2007 spectra owners manual en

kia, the company

Congratulations! Your selection of a Kia was a wise investment.It will give you years of driving pleasure. Now that you are theowner of a Kia vehicle, you’ll probably be asked a lot of ques-tions about your vehicle and the company like “What is a Kia?”,“Who is Kia?”, “What does ‘Kia’ mean?”.Here are some answers. First, Kia is the oldest car company inKorea. It is a company that has thousands of employees focusedon building high-quality vehicles at affordable prices. The first syllable, Ki, in the word “Kia” means “to arise from tothe world” or “to come up out of to the world.” The second syl-lable, a, means “Asia.” So, the word Kia, means “to arise from”or “to come up out of Asia to the world.”

Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!

i

Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.When you require service, remember that your dealerknows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trainedtechnicians, recommended special tools, genuine Kiareplacement parts and is dedicated to your complete sat-isfaction.Because subsequent owners require this important infor-mation as well, this publication should remain with thevehicle if it is sold.This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It issupplemented by a Warranty and Consumer Informationmanual that provides important information on all war-ranties regarding your vehicle. We urge you to read thesepublications carefully and follow the recommendations tohelp assure enjoyable and safe operation of your new vehi-cle.Kia offers a great variety of options, components and fea-tures for its various models.Therefore, the equipment described in this manual, alongwith the various illustrations, may not all be applicable toyour particular vehicle.

The information and specifications provided in this man-ual were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves theright to discontinue or change specifications or design atany time without notice and without incurring any obli-gation. If you have questions, always check with yourKia Dealer.We assure you of our continuing interest in your motor-ing pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.

© 2007 Kia Motors Corp.All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, elec-tronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording,or by any information storage and retrieval system ortranslation in whole or part is not permitted without writ-ten authorization from Kia Motors Corporation.Printed in Korea

Foreword

ii

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Knowing your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

Driving tips

In case of an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications

Index

table of contents

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

How to use this manual / 1-2Vehicle break-in process / 1-3

Introduction

Introduction

21

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

We want to help you get the greatestpossible driving pleasure from yourvehicle. Your Owner’s Manual canassist you in many ways. We strong-ly recommend that you read theentire manual. At the very least, youmust read the WARNING and CAU-TION sections spread throughout themanual, which are easily recognizedby their special markings. These sec-tions have precautions that must befollowed to prevent personal injury ordeath.Illustrations complement the wordsin this manual to best explain how toenjoy your vehicle. By reading yourmanual, you learn about features,important safety information, anddriving tips under various road condi-tions.

The general layout of the manual isprovided in the Table of Contents. Agood place to start is the index; it hasan alphabetical listing of all informa-tion in your manual.Sections: This manual has eight sec-tions plus an index. Each sectionbegins with a brief list of contents soyou can tell at a glance if that sectionhas the information you want.

You’ll find various WARNING’s,CAUTION’s, and NOTICE’s in thismanual. These WARNING’s,CAUTION’s and NOTICE’s were pre-pared to enhance your personalsafety and continued satisfactionwith Kia vehicle. You should carefullyread and follow ALL procedures andrecommendations provided in theseWARNING’s, CAUTION’s andNOTICE’s.

✽✽ NOTICEA NOTICE indicates interesting orhelpful information is being provid-ed.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNING A WARNING indicates a situationin which harm, serious bodilyinjury or death could result if thewarning is ignored.

CAUTIONA CAUTION indicates a situationin which damage to your vehiclecould result if the caution isignored.

1 3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Introduction

VEHICLE BREAK-INPROCESSNo special break-in period is need-ed. By following a few simple precau-tions for the first 1,000 km (600miles) you may add to the perform-ance, economy and life of your vehi-cle.• Do not race the engine.• Do not maintain a single speed for

long periods of time, either fast orslow. Varying engine speed isneeded to properly break-in theengine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-gencies, to allow the brakes to seatproperly.

• Avoid full-throttle starts.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Interior overview / 2-2Instrument panel overview / 2-3Engine compartment / 2-4



22

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Door lock/unlock button

2. Outside rearview mirror control switch*

3. Power window switches*

4. Master power door lock control*

5. Master power window control lock*

6. Vent controls

7. Instrument cluster

8. Steering wheel

9. Steering wheel tilt*

10. Trunk release button

11. Instrument panel illumination*

12. TCS button*

13. Hood release lever

14. Brake pedal

15. Accelerator pedal

16. Fuel filler lid release lever

* : if equipped

OLD006002N

2 3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Driver’s Air bag*

2. Light control / Turn signals

3. Instrument cluster

4. Wiper/Washer

5. Ignition switch

6. Aux

7. Hazard

8. Climate control system

9. Shift lever*

10. Passenger’s air bag*

11. Glove box

12. Audio controls*

13. Auto cruise controls*

* : if equipped

OLD006003N


42

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OLD056002

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box

6. Negative battery terminal

7. Positive battery terminal

8. Auto transaxle oil dipstick*

9. Radiator cap

10. Engine oil dipstick

11. Engine coolant reservoir

12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

* : if equipped

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Keys / 3-2Remote keyless entry / 3-3Immobilizer system / 3-6Door locks / 3-8

Windows / 3-13Seat / 3-16Safety belts / 3-27Air bag - Advanced supplemental restraint

system / 3-50Trunk / 3-76Hood / 3-78Fuel filler lid / 3-80Mirrors / 3-83Interior lights / 3-87Storage compartment / 3-88Interior features / 3-90Sunroof / 3-94Luggage net / 3-97Antenna / 3-98Audio system / 3-99



23

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The key code number is stamped onthe plate attached to the key set.Should you lose your keys, this num-ber will enable an authorized KiaDealer to duplicate the keys easily.Remove the plate and store it in asafe place. Also, record the codenumber and keep it in a safe andhandy place, but not in the vehicle.

Key operationsMaster keyUsed to start the engine, lock andunlock the doors, and open the trunk(if equipped).

KEYS

OUN046100L OUN026060

WARNING - Ignition keyLeaving children unattended ina vehicle with the ignition key isdangerous even if the key is notin the ignition. Children copyadults and they could place thekey in the ignition. The ignitionkey would enable children tooperate power windows or othercontrols, or even make the vehi-cle move, which could result inserious bodily injury or evendeath. Never leave the keys inyour vehicle with unsupervisedchildren.

WARNING Use only Kia original parts forthe ignition key in your vehicle.If an aftermarket key is used, theignition switch may not returnto ON after START. If this hap-pens, the starter will continue tooperate causing damage to thestarter motor and possible firedue to excessive current in thewiring.

3 3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


(1) Lock button(2) Unlock button(3) Panic button(4) Trunk lid open button

Lock (1)All doors are locked and the hazardlamp flash once if the lock button ispressed.

Unlock (2) Driver’s door is unlocked and thehazard lamp will flash twice if theunlock button is pressed once. Alldoors are unlocked if the unlock but-ton is pressed twice within 4 sec-onds.After depressing this button, thedoors will be locked automaticallyunless you open them within 30 sec-onds.

Panic (3) (if equipped)The horn sounds and hazard lampwill flash for about 27 seconds if thisbutton is pressed for more than 0.5seconds.To stop the panic operation, pressany button except panic on the trans-mitter.

Trunk lid open (4) (if equipped)The trunk lid opens if this button ispressed for more than 0.5 seconds.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

OLD026001

OLD026002

Type A

Type B


43

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

✽✽ NOTICEThe transmitter will not work if anyof following occur:- The ignition key is in ignition

switch.- You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 30 m [100 feet]).- The battery in the transmitter is

weak.- Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.- The weather is extremely cold.- The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio stationor an airport which can interferewith normal operation of thetransmitter.

When the transmitter does not workcorrectly, open and close the doorwith the ignition key. If you have aproblem with the transmitter, con-tact an authorized Kia Dealer.

Operational distance may varydepending upon the area the trans-mitter is used in. For example, if thevehicle is parked near police sta-tions, government and public offices,broadcasting stations, military instal-lations, airports, or transmitting tow-ers, etc.

This device complies withIndustry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and 2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesiredoperation.

WARNINGChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliancecould void the user's authorityto operate the equipment.

CAUTIONKeep the transmitter away fromwater or any liquid. If the key-less entry system is inoperativedue to exposure to water or liq-uids, it will not be covered byyour manufacturer vehicle war-ranty.

3 5

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Battery replacementTransmitter uses a 3 volt lithium bat-tery which will normally last for sever-al years.When replacement is neces-sary, use the following procedure.1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and

gently pry open the transmittercenter cover.

2. Replace the battery with new one.When replacing the battery, makesure the battery positive “+” sym-bol faces up as indicated in theillustration.

3. Install the battery in the reverseorder of removal.

For replacement transmitters, see anAuthorized Kia Dealer for reprogram-ming.

CAUTION• Using the wrong battery can

cause the transmitter to mal-function. Be sure to use thecorrect battery.

• To avoid damaging the trans-mitter, don't drop it, get it wet,or expose it to heat or sun-light.

OMG035137 HNF2005

CAUTIONThe keyless entry system trans-mitter is designed to give youyears of troublefree use, howev-er it can malfunction if exposedto moisture or static electricity.If you are unsure how to useyour transmitter or replace thebattery, contact an authorizedKia dealer.


63

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Your vehicle is equipped with anelectronic engine immobilizer systemto reduce the risk of unauthorizedvehicle use.Your immobilizer system is com-prised of a small transponder in theignition key, and antenna coil in thekey cylinder and Immobilizer unit inthe instrument panel.With this system, whenever youinsert your ignition key into the igni-tion switch and turn it to ON, theantenna coil in the ignition switchreceives a signal from the transpon-der in the ignition key and then sendsthe signal to the Immobilizer unit.

The Immobilizer unit checks the sig-nal and determines whether the igni-tion key is valid.If the key is determined to be valid,the engine will start.If the key is determined to be invalid,the engine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizer sys-tem:Insert the ignition key into the keycylinder and turn it to the ON posi-tion.

To activate the immobilizer sys-tem:Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi-tion. The immobilizer system acti-vates automatically. Without a validignition key for your vehicle, theengine will not start.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen starting the engine, do not usethe key with other immobilizer keysaround. Otherwise the engine maynot start or may stop soon after itstarts. Keep each key separately notto have any malfunction after youreceive your new vehicle.

This device complies withIndustry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause inter-

ference, and 2. This device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation ofthe device.

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliancecould void the user's authorityto operate the equipment.

OHD046100

3 7

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Limp home (override) proce-dureWhen you turn the ignition key to theON position, if the IMMO indicatorremains on continuously after blink-ing 6 times, your transponderequipped in the ignition key is out oforder. You cannot start the enginewithout the lime home procedure. Tostart the engine, you have to inputyour password by using the ignitionswitch.

The following procedure is how toinput your password of “2345” as anexample.1. Turn the ignition key to the ON posi-

tion. The IMMO indicator ( ) willblink 6 times and remain on indicat-ing the beginning of the limp homeprocedure.

2. Turn the ignition key to the ACCposition.

3. To enter the first digit (in thisexample “2”), turn the ignition keyto the ON and ACC position twice.Perform the same procedure forthe next digits between 3 secondsand 10 seconds (for example, for“3”, turn the ignition ON and ACC3 times).

4. If all of the digits have been inputsuccessfully, you have to start theengine within 10 seconds. If youattempt to start the engine after 10seconds, the engine will not startand you will have to input yourpassword again.

After performing the limp home pro-cedure, you have to see an author-ized Kia dealer immediately toinspect and repair your ignition keyor immobilizer system.

CAUTION The transponder in your ignitionkey is an important part of theimmobilizer system. It isdesigned to give years of trou-ble free service, however youshould avoid exposure to mois-ture, static electricity and roughhandling. Immobilizer systemmalfunction could occur.

CAUTION If you cannot start your enginein spite of limp home procedure,have your vehicle towed by anauthorized Kia dealer forinspection and necessaryrepairs.

CAUTION Do not change, alter or adjustthe immobilizer system becauseit could cause the immobilizersystem to malfunction andshould only be serviced by anauthorized Kia dealer.Malfunctions caused by improp-er alterations, adjustments ormodifications to the immobilizersystem are not covered by yourvehicle manufacturer warranty.


83

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Operating door locks fromoutside the vehicle • Turn the key toward rear of vehicle

to unlock and toward front of vehi-cle to lock.

• Turn the key to the right once tounlock the driver’s door and to theright twice within 4 seconds tounlock all doors. (if equipped)

• Turn the key to the left once tounlock the passenger’s door and tothe left twice within 4 seconds tounlock all doors. (if equipped)

• Doors can also be locked andunlocked with the transmitter key.

• Once the doors are unlocked, theymay be opened by pulling the doorhandle.

• When closing the door, push thedoor by the hand. Make sure thatdoors are closed securely.

To lock a door without the key, pushthe inside door lock button (1) ordoor lock switch (2, if equipped) tothe “LOCK” position and close thedoor (3).

DOOR LOCKS

1LDA2004

Lock Unlock

OLD036900N

WARNING Always remove the ignition key,engage the parking brake, closeall windows and lock all doorswhen leaving your vehicle unat-tended.

3 9

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


✽✽ NOTICEIf the door is locked/unlocked multi-ple times in rapid succession witheither the vehicle key or door lockswitch, the system may stop operat-ing temporarily in order to protectthe circuit and prevent damage tosystem components.

Operating door locks frominside the vehicleWith the door lock button• To unlock a door, push the door

lock button (1) to the “Unlock” posi-tion.The red mark (2) on button willbe visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lockbutton (1) to the “Lock” position. Ifthe door is locked properly, the redmark (2) on the door lock buttonwill not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door han-dle (3) outward.

• If the inner door handle of driver’s(front passenger’s, if equipped)door is pulled when the door lockbutton is in lock position, the buttonis unlocked and door opens.

• Front doors cannot be locked if theignition key is in the ignition switchand door is open.

• If you lock the front door with doorlock button, all vehicle doors willlock automatically. (if equipped)

1LDA2006

Lock Unlock


103

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 With central door lock switch (if equipped)It is operated by depressing the doorlock switch. If any door is open whenthe switch is depressed, the door willremain locked when closed.

• When pushing down on the frontportion (1) of the central door lockswitch, all vehicle doors will lock.

• When pushing down on the rearportion (2) of the switch, all vehicledoors will unlock.

• However, if the key is in the ignitionswitch and any front door is open,the doors will not lock when thefront portion of central door lockswitch is pressed.

1LDA2007

1LDN2007

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side (if equipped)

WARNING • The doors should always be

fully closed and locked whilethe vehicle is in motion to pre-vent accidental opening of thedoor. Locked doors will alsodiscourage potential intruderswhen the vehicle stops orslows.

• Be careful when openingdoors and watch for vehicles,motorcycles, bicycles orpedestrians approaching thevehicle in the path of the door.Opening a door when some-thing is approaching cancause damage or injury.

3 11

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Rear door child safety lockThe child safety lock is provided tohelp prevent children from acciden-tally opening the rear doors frominside the vehicle. The rear doorsafety locks should be used whenev-er children are in the vehicle.

1LDA2008

WARNING - Unlockedvehicle

Leaving your vehicle unlockedcan invite theft or possible harmto you or others from someonehiding in your vehicle while youare gone. Always remove theignition key, engage the parkingbrake, close all windows andlock all doors when leaving yourvehicle unattended.

WARNING - Unattendedchildren

An enclosed vehicle canbecome extremely hot, causingdeath or severe injury to unat-tended children or animals whocannot escape the vehicle.Furthermore, children mightoperate features of the vehiclethat could injure them, or theycould encounter other harm,possibly from someone gainingentry to the vehicle. Never leavechildren or animals unattendedin your vehicle.


123

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1. Open the rear door.2. Push the child safety lock located

on the rear edge of the door to the“lock” position. When the childsafety lock is in the “lock ( )”position, rear door will not openwhen the inner door handle ispulled inside the vehicle.

3. Close the rear door.4. To open the rear door, pull the out-

side door handle.Even though the doors may beunlocked, the rear door will not openby pulling the inner door handle (1)until rear door child safety lock isunlocked ( ).

Rear hatch (if equipped)Opening the rear hatch• Rear hatch is locked or unlocked

with a key.• To open the rear hatch, insert the

key into the lock, turn it to theunlock position (1) and pull up therear hatch by pressing the handle(2).

• You can also lock/unlock the latch(but not release it) with the centraldoor lock system (if equipped).

• If unlocked, the rear hatch can beopened by pressing the handle (2)and pulling the hatch up.

WARNING - Rear doorlocks

If children accidentally open therear doors while the vehicle is inmotion, they could fall out andbe severely injured or killed. Toprevent children from openingthe rear doors from the inside,the rear door safety locksshould be used whenever chil-dren are in the vehicle.

Lock Unlock

3 13

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Power windows (if equipped)(1) Driver’s door power window

switch(2) Front passenger’s door power

window switch(3) Rear door (left) power window

switch(4) Rear door (right) power window

switch(5) Window opening and closing(6) Automatic power window down*

(Driver’s window)(7) Power window lock switch

*: if equipped

WINDOWS

OLD026010


143

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The ignition switch must be in the ONposition for power windows to oper-ate. Each door has a power windowswitch that controls the door’s win-dow. However, the driver has a powerwindow lock switch which can blockthe operation of passenger windows.The power windows can be operatedfor approximately 30 seconds afterthe ignition key is removed or turnedto the ACC or LOCK position.However, if the front doors areopened, the power windows cannotbe operated even within the 30 sec-onds after the ignition key removal.While driving, if you notice buffetingand pulsation (wind shock) witheither side window open, you shouldopen the opposite window slightly toreduce the condition.

Window opening and closingThe driver’s door has a master powerwindow switch that controls all thewindows in the vehicle.To open or close a window, pressdown or pull up the front portion ofthe corresponding switch to the firstdetent position (5).

Auto down window (if equipped) (Driver’s window)Depressing the power window switchmomentarily to the second detentposition (6) completely lowers thedriver’s window even when theswitch is released. To stop the win-dow at the desired position while thewindow is in operation, pull up theswitch momentarily to the oppositedirection of the window movement.If the power window is not operatedcorrectly, the automatic power win-dow system must be reset as follows:1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position.

OUN026011OUN026012

3 15

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


2. Close driver’s window and contin-ue pulling up on driver’s powerwindow switch for at least 1 sec-ond after the window is complete-ly closed.

Power window lock switch• The driver can disable the power

window switches on a passengerdoor by depressing the power win-dow lock switch located on the dri-ver’s door to LOCK (pressed).

• When the power window lockswitch is ON, the driver’s mastercontrol cannot operate the passen-ger door power windows either.

Manual windows (if equipped)Use the window crank to open andclose each window.

3FDA2015

OLD026013

CAUTION To prevent the power windowsystem from the possibility ofdamage, do not open or closetwo windows at the same time.This will also ensure thelongevity of the fuse.

WARNING • Make sure heads and hands

are safely out of the way beforeclosing a window.

• Do not allow children to playwith the power windows. Keepthe driver’s door power windowlock switch in the LOCK posi-tion (depressed). Serious injurycan result from unintentionalwindow operation by the child.

• Do not extend face or arms out-side through the window open-ing while driving.

• Always double check to makesure all arms, hands and otherobstructions are safely out ofthe way before closing a win-dow.


163

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Driver’s seat(1) Seat adjustment, forward / back-

ward(2) Seatback recliner(3) Seat adjustment, height(4) Headrest adjustment

Front passenger seat(5) Seat adjustment, forward / back-

ward (6) Seatback recliner(7) Headrest adjustment

Rear seat(8) Split folding rear seat* (9) Headrest adjustment* : if equipped

SEAT

1LDN2026

• Type A • Type B

3 17

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


WARNING - Objects onfloor

Loose objects in the driver’sfoot area could interfere withthe operation of the foot pedals,possibly causing an accident.Do not place anything under thefront seats.

WARNING - Seating posi-tion

• Never attempt to adjust seatwhile the vehicle is moving.This could result in loss ofcontrol, and an accident caus-ing death or serious injury.

• Do not allow anything to inter-fere with the normal positionof the seatback. Storing itemsagainst a seatback or in anyother way interfering withproper locking of a seatbackcould result in serious or fatalinjury in a sudden stop or col-lision.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Always drive and ride with

your seatback upright and thelap portion of the safety belt,is snug and low across thehips. This puts your safetybelts in the best position toprotect you in case of an acci-dent.

• In order to avoid unnecessaryairbag injuries including thepossibility of severe injury ordeath, always sit as far backas possible from the steeringwheel so that your chest isaway at least 250 mm (10 inch-es) away from the steeringwheel.


183

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Driver’s seat adjustmentAdjusting the seat forward andbackwardTo move the seat forward or back-ward:1. Pull the seat slide adjustment

lever under the front edge of theseat cushion up and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position youdesire.

3. Release the lever and make surethe seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, andmake sure the seat is locked secure-ly by trying to move forward andbackward without using the lever. Ifthe seat moves, it is not locked prop-erly.

Adjusting height of driver seatcushion (if equipped)Pivoting the lever upward to raise theseat cushion.Pivoting the lever downward to lowerthe seat cushion.

1LDA2027 1LDA2028

3 19

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Adjusting the driver’s seatbackreclinerTo recline the seatback:1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on

the seatback recline lever locatedon the outside of the seat, towardthe rear.

2. Carefully lean back on the seatand adjust the back of the seat tothe position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make surethe seatback is locked in place.(The lever MUST return to its orig-inal position for the seatback tolock.)

1LDA2029

WARNINGDriving or riding in a vehiclewith a front seatback reclinedcould lead to serious or fatalinjury in an accident. If a frontseat is reclined during an acci-dent, the occupant’s hips mayslide under the lap portion ofthe safety belt applying greatforce to the unprotectedabdomen. Serious or fatal inter-nal injuries could result. Thedriver must advise the front pas-senger to keep the seatbacks incomfortably upright positionwhenever the vehicle is inmotion.


203

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Headrest adjustmentAdjusting the height up and downThe headrest not only provides com-fort for the driver and passengers,but also helps to protect the headand neck in the event of a collision.To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower theheadrest, push and hold the releasebutton (2) on the headrest supportand lower the headrest to the desiredposition (3). For best protection,adjust the headrest so its center is ashigh as your ears.

RemovalTo remove the headrest, raise it asfar as it can go then press therelease button (1) while pullingupward (2).

Active headrest (if equipped)The active headrest is designed tomove forward and upward during arear impact. This helps to prevent thedriver's and front passenger’s headfrom moving backward and thushelps prevent neck injuries.

1LDA2033 1LDA2034

WARNINGTo reduce the risk of head andneck injuries, do not drive thevehicle with the headrestremoved or improperly posi-tioned.Do not adjust the driver’s head-rest while driving.

HNF2041-1

3 21

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Adjusting the front passengerseatForward/backward positionadjustmentTo move the seat forward or back-ward:1. Pull the seat slide adjustment

lever under the front edge of theseat cushion up and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position youdesire.

3. Release the lever and make surethe seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, andmake sure the seat is locked secure-ly by trying to move forward andbackward without using the lever. Ifthe seat moves, it is not locked prop-erly.

Adjusting seatback reclinerTo recline the seatback:1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on

the seatback recline lever locatedon the outside of the seat, towardthe rear.

2. Carefully lean back on the seatand adjust the back of the seat tothe position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make surethe seatback is locked in place.(The lever MUST return to its orig-inal position for the seatback tolock.)

1LDA2035

WARNINGIn order to avoid unnecessaryair bag injuries including thepossibility of severe injury ordeath, always sit as far back aspossible by moving the seat farback, while still maintaininggood vehicle control. Seriousinjury or death may be causeddue to the deployment of thepassenger’s air bag.

1LDA2036


223

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Headrest adjustmentAdjusting the height up and downThe headrest not only provides com-fort for the driver and passengers,but also helps to protect the headand neck in the event of a collision.To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower theheadrest, push and hold the releasebutton (2) on the headrest supportand lower the headrest to the desiredposition (3). For best protection,adjust the headrest so its center is ashigh as your ears.


WARNING - Driverresponsibility for front seatpassenger

Driving or riding in a vehiclewith a front seatback reclinedcould lead to serious or fatalinjury in an accident. If a frontseat is reclined, the occupant’ships may slide under the lapportion of the safety belt apply-ing great force to the unprotect-ed abdomen. Serious or fatalinternal injuries could result.Keep the seatbacks in a com-fortably upright position when-ever the vehicle is in motion.

1LDA2033A 1LDA2034A

WARNINGTo reduce the risk of head andneck injuries, do not drive thevehicle with the headrestremoved or improperly posi-tioned.

3 23

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Active headrest (if equipped)The active headrest is designed tomove forward and upward during arear impact. This helps to prevent thedriver's and front passenger’s headfrom moving backward and thushelps prevent neck injuries.

Rear seatSplit folding rear seat (if equipped)The rear seatbacks fold forward toprovide additional cargo space andto provide access to the cargo area.• To fold the rear seatback(s) down,

pull the lock release lever, then foldthe seatback forward and down.

• To raise the seatback, lift and pushit firmly until it clicks into place.

• When you return the seatback toits upright position, reposition therear safety belts so that they canbe used by rear seat passengers.

4 Door (if equipped)1. Pull the lock release lever.2. Move the rear three-point seat

belts to the outside (1) so that theydon’t interfere with the seatbackwhen lowering.

3. Fold the seatback forward anddown firmly (2).

1LDN2038

1LDN3025

HNF2041-1


243

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

5 Door (if equipped)1. Lift the front of seat cushion (1) up.2. Lift the rear of seat cushion up (2).

3 Move the seat cushion firmly until itclicks (3).

4. Remove the headrest and put theheadrest poles into the holes onthe rear of the seat cushion (4).

5. Pull the lock release lever (5).6. Fold the seatback forward and

down firmly (6).

1LDA2243

1LDA2244

1LDA2241

1LDA2242

1LDA2239/1LDA2239A

1LDA2240

Type A Type B

3 25

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


✽✽ NOTICEWhen you fold the rear seatback orput luggage on the rear seat cushion,insert the buckle in the pocketbetween the rear seatback and cush-ion. Doing so can prevent the bucklefrom being damaged by the rearseatback or luggage.

To unfold the rear seat:1. Move the rear center shoulder belt

(1) to the side so that it is clear ofthe seatback.

2. Lift and push the seatback back-ward firmly until it clicks into place(2).Move and push the seat cushiondownward firmly to the properposition (5 Door, if equipped).

3. Replace the rear safty belt to theproper position.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the seat belt is locked during theseatback folding, pull out andretract the seat belt to release it.

1LDN3026A1LDN3026B

CAUTION • When returning the rear seat-

backs to the upright position,remember to return the rearshoulder belts to their properposition.

• Do not remove the floor carpetin your vehicle. Emission con-trol system componentscause high exhaust tempera-tures under the floor.

WARNING - Cargo dangerCargo should always besecured to prevent it from shift-ing and causing injury to thevehicle occupants.


263

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Headrest adjustment Adjusting the height up and downThe headrest not only provides com-fort for the driver and passengers,but also helps to protect the headand neck in the event of a collision.To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower theheadrest, push and hold the releasebutton (2) on the headrest supportand lower the headrest to the desiredposition (3). For best protection,adjust the headrest so its center is ashigh as your ears.


1LDA2042

WARNINGTo reduce the risk of head andneck injuries, do not drive thevehicle with the headrestremoved or improperly posi-tioned.

1LDA2043

CAUTION - Loading pro-cedure

Make sure the engine is off, thetransaxle is in P and the parkingbrake is applied whenever load-ing or unloading cargo. Vehiclemay move if shift lever is inad-vertently moved to anotherposition.

3 27

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Pre-tensioner seat beltYour vehicle is equipped with driver’sand front passenger’s pre-tensionerseat belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to make sure that theseat belts fit tightly against the occu-pant’s body in certain frontal colli-sions. The pre-tensioner seat beltscan be activated together with the airbags, where the frontal collision issevere enough.

The pre-tensioner seat belt isinstalled at the front seats, and thesensor is equipped inside the buckle,where presence of passenger issensed by the fastening of the seatbelts. Therefore, pre-tensioner willnot activate if the passenger is notfastened with the seat belts.Likewise, it will activate if buckledeven without a passenger in theseat. Pre-tensioner seat belt isdesigned to activate when the seat-belt is in use. To ensure the preten-sioner seatbelts activate in event of apossible seatbelt buckle switch mal-function, the system is designed toactivate regardless of whether a seatbelt is in use or if no seat belt use isdetected within 6 seconds of turningthe ignition switch ON.

The seat belt pre-tensioner systemconsists mainly of the following com-ponents.Their locations are shown inthe illustration.(1) SRS airbag warning light(2) Seatbelt pre-tensioner assembly(3) SRS airbag control module

SAFETY BELTS

2GHB3002 2GHB3001

1

2 3


283

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

WARNINGTo obtain maximum benefit froma pre-tensioner seat belt:• The seat belt must be worn

correctly.• The seat belt must be adjusted

to the correct position.

CAUTIONWhen the pre-tensioner seatbelts are activated, a loud noisemay be heard and fine dust,which may appear to be smoke,may be visible in the passengercompartment and are not toxic.Although, it is harmless, the finedust may cause skin irritationand should not be breathed forprolonged periods. Wash yourhands and face thoroughly afteran accident in which the airbags and/or pre-tensioner seatbelts were activated.

CAUTION • Because the sensor that acti-

vates the SRS air bag is con-nected with pre-tensioner seatbelt, the SRS air bag warninglight on the instrument panelwill blink or illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds afterthe ignition key has beenturned to the “ON” position,then the light should go off.

• If the pre-tensioner seat belt isnot working properly, thiswarning light will illuminateeven if there is no malfunctionof SRS air bag system. If theSRS air bag warning lightdoes not illuminate when theignition key is turned to “ON”,or if it remains illuminatedafter blinking or illuminatingfor approximately 6 seconds,or if it illuminates while thevehicle is being driven, pleasehave an authorized Kia dealerinspect the pre-tensioner seatbelt or SRS air bag system assoon as possible.

3 29

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


WARNING• Pre-tensioners are designed

to operate once. After activa-tion, pre-tensioner seat beltsmust be replaced. All seatbelts, of any type, shouldalways be replaced after theyhave been worn during a colli-sion.

• Do not attempt to inspect orreplace the pre-tensioner seatbelts yourself. This must bedone by an authorized Kiadealer.

CAUTION The pre-tensioner seat beltassembly mechanisms becomehot during activation. Do nottouch the pre-tensioner seatbelt assembly for several min-utes after they have been acti-vated.

WARNING• Do not strike the pre-tensioner

seat belt assemblies.• Do not attempt to service or

repair the pre-tensioner seatbelt system in any manner.

• Improper handling of the pre-tensioner seat belt assem-blies, and failure to heed thewarnings not to strike, modify,inspect, place, service orrepair the pre-tensioner seatbelt assemblies may lead toimproper operation or inad-vertent activation causingserious injury.Always wear the seat beltswhen driving or riding in amotor vehicle.


303

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Safety belt restraint system We strongly recommend that thedriver and all passengers be proper-ly restrained at all times by using thesafety belts provided with the vehi-cle. Proper use of the safety beltsdecreases the risk of severe injury ordeath in accidents or sudden stops.In most states, and in Canada, thelaw requires their use.

All seats have lap/shoulder belts.Inertial locks in the safety belt retrac-tors allow all of the lap/shoulder safe-ty belts to remain unlocked duringnormal vehicle operation. This allowsthe occupants some freedom ofmovement and increased comfortwhile using the safety belts. If a forceis applied to the vehicle, such as astrong stop, a sharp turn, or a colli-sion, the safety belt retractors willautomatically lock the safety belts.

Since the inertial locks do not requirea collision in order to lock up, youmay become aware of the safetybelts locking while braking or goingaround sharp corners.Always use the rear seat position(s)to install your child restraint(s).Never install a child restraint systemin the front passenger position, as aninflating air bag could cause seriousor fatal injury to a child in that posi-tion.

WARNING - Safety beltsTo minimize the risk of seriousor fatal injury in an accident, thedriver and all passengersshould use the appropriatesafety restraints for their ageand size. The presence of airbags does not change the needto be properly restrained by asafety belt or size-appropriatechild restraint. In fact, air bagsare designed to work the bestwhen passengers are correctlyrestrained in the vehicle. Besure you are familiar with theinformation in this section,including the information oninfant and child restraints. Readthe safety warnings on the sunvisors of your vehicle also.

3 31

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


The rear safety belts use a specialauto-lock feature designed to allow achild restraint to be used in thesepositions without an added lockingclip. They normally lock only underextreme or emergency conditions(emergency lock mode). Howeverthey can be adjusted so that theyremain in fixed and locked when achild restraint system is placed inthese positions. (Use this auto-lockmode only to secure a child restraint,never for passengers restrained bythe safety belts.) Page 3-44 givesinstructions on placing the safety beltin the auto lock mode.The drivers safety belt can only oper-ate in the emergency lock mode.

Safety belts provide the best restraintwhen:• The seatback is upright.• The occupant is sitting upright (not

slouched).• The lap belt is snug across the hips.• The shoulder belt is snug across

the chest.• The knees are straight forward.To help you remember to fasten yoursafety belt, a warning light will comeon and a chime will sound. SeeSafety Belt Warning Light and Chimeon page 3-33.

WARNING - Cargo area (if equipped)

Passengers should never beallowed to ride in the cargo areaof a vehicle. No safety belts areprovided for the cargo area.Persons riding in the vehiclewithout a fastened safety beltare much more likely to sufferserious bodily injury or deathduring an accident.

WARNING - Twisted beltsA twisted or jammed safety beltcannot restrain you properly. Ifyou cannot untwist or unjam thesafety belt, have an authorizedKia dealer it immediately. Neverdrive or ride with a twisted orjammed safety belt.

WARNING - After a colli-sion

• Lap/shoulder belt assembliesmay be stretched or damagedwhen subjected to the stressand forces of a collision.

• The entire restraint systemshould be inspected followingany collision. All belts, retrac-tors, anchors and hardwaredamaged by a collision shouldbe replaced before the vehicleis operated again.


323

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

WARNING - Belt useSafety belts must be used cor-rectly to work properly in anaccident. Each seating positionin your vehicle has a specificsafety belt assembly thatincludes a buckle and tonguedesigned to be used together.For greatest effectiveness, fol-low these guidelines in usingsafety belts:• Use the shoulder portion of

the safety belt on the outsideshoulder only. Never wear theshoulder portion under thearm.

• Never swing the safety beltaround your neck to fit overthe inside shoulder.

• Never wear the shoulder por-tion of the safety belt acrossthe neck or face.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Wear the lap portion as low as

possible. Be sure that the lapbelt fits snugly around thehips. Never wear a lap portionof a lap/shoulder belt overyour waist; it should alwaysgo over the stronger area ofyour hips.

• Never use a single safety beltfor more than one person.

• The front seatbacks shouldalways remain in a comfort-able, upright position whenthe vehicle is moving.

(Continued)• Inspect your safety belts peri-

odically for excessive wear ordamage. Pull out each beltfully and look for fraying, cuts,burns or other damage. Pullthe safety belt out and let itretract a number of times.Make sure that the lap/shoul-der belts return smoothly andeasily into the retractor.

• Check the latches to makesure they latch and releasewithout interference or delay.

• Never close the doors on anypart of the lap or shoulderbelt.

• Any belt not in good conditionor in good working ordershould be promptly replaced.

WARNING - Safety beltcare

• A damaged belt may not giveyou the protection you need inan accident.

(Continued)CAUTION

Never close the doors on anypart of the lap or shoulder belt.It can damage the safety belt orbuckle which could increase therisk of injury in case of an acci-dent.

3 33

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Safety belt warning light andchimeIf the driver's lap/shoulder belt is notfastened when the ignition switch isturned ON, the safety belt warninglight and chime will activate for about6 seconds. And if the lap/shoulderbelt is fastened when the ignitionswitch is turned ON, the safety beltwarning light will blink for about 6seconds.

If the lap/shoulder belt is unfastenedwhile the lap/shoulder belt is fas-tened with the ignition switch ON, thesafety belt warning light will blink forabout 6 seconds and if the vehiclespeed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph) thesafety belt warning light and chimewill activate until it is fastened.

Lap/shoulder beltTo fasten the lap/shoulder belt:1. Grasp the buckle and tongue

plate.2. Slowly pull the lap/shoulder belt

out from the retractor.3. Insert the tongue plate (1) into the

open end of the buckle (2) until anaudible “click” is heard, indicatingthe belt is locked in the buckle.

1GQA2083 B180A01NF-1


343

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

4. Position the lap portion of the beltacross your lap as LOW ON THEHIPS as possible to reduce therisk of sliding under it during anaccident. Adjust the belt to aSNUG FIT by pulling up on theshoulder portion of the safety belt.The belt retractor is designed totake up excess webbing automati-cally and to maintain tension onthe belt. For your safety, do not putany excess slack into the safetybelt at any location.

5. Adjust the shoulder anchor posi-tion to your size. To raise theanchor position, push the anchorup (1). To lower the anchor posi-tion, press (2) the button and slidethe anchor down (3). After adjust-ment, make sure the anchor islocked in position.

If the height of the adjusting seat beltis too near your neck, you will not begetting the most effective protection.The shoulder portion should beadjusted so that it lies across yourchest and midway over your shouldernearest the door and not your neck.

B200A02NF OUN026100

WARNING - Beld adjust• The height adjuster must be in

the locked position when thevehicle is moving.

• The misadjustment of heightof the shoulder belt couldreduce the effectiveness ofthe seat belt in a crash.

3 35

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


To unfasten the lap/shoulder belt:Press the release button on thebuckle and allow the belt to slowlyretract.

When using the rear center seat belt,the buckle with the “CENTER” markmust be used.

3 Point rear center belt (if equipped)To fasten the rear center belt1. Extract the tongue plates from the

holes on the belt assembly coverand slowly pull the tongue platesout from the retractor.

B210A01NF 1LDN2045 1LDN3207


363

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

2. Insert the tongue plate (A) into theopen end of the buckle (C) until anaudible “click" is heard, indicatingthe latch is locked. Make sure thebelt is not twisted.

3. Pull the tongue plate (B) andinsert the tongue plate into theopen end of the buckle (D) until anaudible “click” is heard, indicatingthe latch is locked. Make sure thebelt is not twisted.

There will be an audible “click” whenthe tab locks in the buckle. The seatbelt automatically adjusts to theproper length only after the lap belt isadjusted manually so that it fits snug-ly around your hips, if you lean for-ward in a slow, easy motion, the beltwill extend and let you move around.If there is a sudden stop or impact,the belt will lock into position. It willalso lock if you try to lean forward tooquickly.1LDN3209

WARNINGWhen using the rear seat centerbelt, you must lock all tongueplates and buckle/anchor con-nector. If any tongue plate orbuckle/anchor connector is notlocked, it will increase thechance of injury or death in theevent of collision.

1LDN3208A

3 37

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


To unfasten the rear center belt 1. Press the release button on the

buckle (D) and remove the tongueplate (B) from the buckle (D).

2. To retract the rear center seatbelt,insert the key or similar small rigiddevice into the web release button(C) on the anchor connector. Pullup on the seat belt web (A) andallow the webbing to retract auto-matically. (5 Door, if equipped)

3. Insert the tongue plates into theholes and hang the tongue plateson the hooks on the belt assemblycover.

1LDN3211A1LDN3210 1LDN3215


383

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Proper use and care of thesafety belt system To ensure that the safety belts pro-vide the maximum protection, pleasefollow these instructions:• Use the belts at all times - even on

short trips.• If the safety belt is twisted, straight-

en it prior to use.• Keep sharp edges and damaging

objects away from the belts.• Periodically inspect belt webbing,

anchors, buckles and all otherparts for signs of wear and dam-age. Replace damaged, excessive-ly worn or questionable partsimmediately.

• To clean the belt webbing, use amild soap solution recommendedfor cleaning upholstery or carpets.Follow the instructions providedwith the soap.

• Do not make modifications or addi-tions to the safety belt.

• After wearing a safety belt, makesure it fully retracts to the stowedposition. Do not allow the belt toget caught in the door when youclose it.

Restraint of pregnant women Pregnant women should wearlap/shoulder belt assemblies when-ever possible according to specificrecommendations by their doctors.The lap portion of the belt should beworn AS SNUGLY AND LOW ASPOSSIBLE.

WARNING - Pregnantwomen

Pregnant women must neverplace the lap portion of the safe-ty belt over the area of theabdomen where the fetus islocated or above the abdomenwhere the belt could injure thefetus during an impact.

WARNINGDo not bleach or dye the web-bing because this may weakenthe webbing fibers and allowthem to fail when loaded in acollision.

3 39

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Restraint of infants and smallchildren To increase their safety, infants andyoung children should always berestrained by a restraint systemapproved for their age and size.Never allow a child to stand or kneelon the seat of a moving vehicle.Never allow a safety belt to be placedaround both a child and an adult oraround two children at the sametime.It is best for children to be seated inthe rear seats.

Many companies manufacture childrestraint systems (often called childseats) for infants and small children.An acceptable child restraint systemmust always satisfy the SafetyStandards of your country. Makesure that any child-restraint systemyou use in your vehicle is labelled ascomplying with those safety stan-dards.The child-restraint system should bechosen to fit both the size of the childand the size of the vehicle seat. Besure to follow any instructions provid-ed by the child-restraint system man-ufacturer when installing the child-restraint system.

WARNING - Infants andyoung children

• Infants and young children areat much greater risk of seriousinjury or death in an accidentor sudden stop if they are unre-strained or restrained improp-erly. Follow all instructions inthis section of your Kia manualand the instructions that cameon and with an improved childsafety restraint system. Thechild restraint must be correct-ly installed in the vehicle, andthe child must be correctlyinstalled in the child restraint.

• All children under 12 aresafest in the back seat.

• Never install a child or infantseat in the front passengerposition. The baby will beinjured or killed by the air bagif it deploys in an accident.

• Never allow a child to stand orkneel on the seat of a movingvehicle. Insist the child sit downin an approved restraint system.

WARNING - Children onlaps

Never hold a child on your lap orin your arms in a moving vehi-cle.Even a very strong person can-not hold onto a child in theevent of even a minor collision.


403

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Restraint of larger children As children grow, they may need touse new child-restraint systems,including larger child seats or boost-er seats, which are appropriate fortheir increased size.A child who has outgrown availablechild-restraint systems should usethe belts provided in the vehicle.When seated in the rear outboardseats, the child should be restrainedby the lap/shoulder belt.If the shoulder belt portion slightlytouches the child’s neck or face, tryplacing the child closer to the centerof the vehicle. If the shoulder belt stilltouches their face or neck they mayneed to be returned to a childrestraint system. In addition, after-market devices are available fromindependent manufacturers whichhelp pull the shoulder belt down andaway from the child’s face or neck.Larger children should use one ofthe seat belts provided.

WARNING - Shoulderbelts on small children

• Never allow a shoulder belt tobe in contact with a child’sneck or face while the vehicleis in motion.

• If safety belts are not properlyworn and adjusted, there is arisk of death or serious injuryto such a child.

WARNING - Hot metalparts

Safety belts and seats canbecome hot in a vehicle that hasbeen closed during warm/hotweather; they could burn achild. Check seat covers andbuckles before you place a childanywhere near them.

3 41

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Child restraint system (if equipped)For small children and babies, theuse of a child seat or infant seat isrequired by law. This child seat orinfant seat should be of appropriatesize for the child and should beinstalled in accordance with the man-ufacturer's instructions. It is stronglyrecommended that the seat beplaced in the vehicle's rear seatsince this can make an importantcontribution to safety.Children riding in the car should siton the rear seat and must always beproperly restrained to minimize therisk of injury in an accident, suddenstop or sudden maneuver. Accordingto accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in therear seats than in the front seat.

You are required by law to use safe-ty restraints for children. If small chil-dren ride in your vehicle you mustput them in a child restraint system(safety seat).Children could be injured or killed ina crash if their restraints are notproperly secured. For small childrenand babies, a child seat or infant seatmust be used. Before buying a par-ticular child restraint system, makesure it fits your car and seat belts,and fits your child. Follow all theinstructions provided by the manu-facturer when installing the childrestraint system.

ADAIR BAG

WARNING• A child restraint system must

be placed in the rear seat.Never install a child or infantseat on the front passenger'sseat.Should an accident occur andcause the passenger air bagto deploy, it could severelyinjure or kill an infant or childseated in an infant or childseat. Thus, only use a childrestraint in the rear seat ofyour vehicle.

(Continued)


423

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

(Continued)• Always make sure that the

shoulder belt portion of thelap/shoulder belt is positionedmidway over the shoulder,never across the neck orbehind the back. The lap beltportion of the lap/shoulderbelt must always be posi-tioned as low as possible onthe child's hips and as snugas possible.

• If the seat belt will not proper-ly fit the child the use of anapproved booster seat in therear seat must be used inorder to raise the child's seat-ing height so that the seat beltwill properly fit the child.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Never allow a child to stand up

or kneel on the seat.• Never use an infant carrier or

child seat that "hooks" over aseatback. It will not provideadequate protection in anaccident.

• Never allow a child to be heldwhile they are in a movingvehicle, as this could result inserious injury or death to thechild in the event of an acci-dent or sudden stop. Holdinga child in a moving vehicledoes not provide the childwith any protection during anaccident, even if the personholding the child is wearing aseat belt.

(Continued)• Since a safety belt or child

restraint system can becomevery hot if it is left in a closedvehicle, be sure to check theseat cover and buckles beforeplacing a child there.

• When the child restraint sys-tem is not in use, store it in thetrunk or fasten it with a safetybelt so that it will not bethrown forward in the case ofa sudden stop or an accident.

• Children who are too large tobe in a child restraint shouldsit in the rear seat and berestrained with the availablelap/shoulder belts. Neverallow children to ride in thefront passenger seat.

(Continued)

3 43

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Installing a child restraint system For safety reasons, we recommendthat the child restraint system beused in the rear seats. Never placea rear-facing child restraint in thefront passenger seat, because ofthe danger that an inflating pas-senger side air bag could impactthe rear-facing child restraint andkill the child.Since all passenger’s (except dri-ver’s) safety belts move freely undernormal conditions and only lockunder extreme or emergency condi-tions (emergency lock mode), youmust manually change these safetybelts to the auto lock mode to securea child restraint.

✽✽ NOTICEThe driver’s safety belt incorporatesthe emergency lock mode only.

WARNING• Do not install any child

restraint system in the frontpassenger seat. Should anaccident occur and cause thepassenger air bag to deploy, itcould severely injure or kill aninfant or child seated in aninfant or child seat. Therefore,only use a child restraint sys-tem in the rear seat of yourvehicle.

• If the child restraint seat is notanchored properly, the risk ofa child being seriously injuredor killed in a collision greatlyincreases.

WARNING• Before installing the child

restraint system, read theinstructions supplied by thechild restraint system manu-facturer.

• If the seat belt does not oper-ate as described, have thesystem checked immediatelyby your authorized Kia dealer.

• Failure to observe this manualinstructions regarding childrestraint system and theinstructions provided with thechild restraint system couldincrease the chance and/orseverity of injury in an acci-dent.


443

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Placing a passenger safetybelt into the auto lock modeThe use of the auto lock mode willensure that the normal movement ofthe child in the vehicle does notcause the safety belt to be pulled outand loosen the firmness of its holdon the child restraint system. Tosecure a child restraint system, usethe following procedure.

Installing a child restraint system bylap/shoulder beltTo install a child restraint system onthe outboard or center rear seats, dothe following:1. Place the child restraint system in

the seat and route the lap/shoul-der belt around or through therestraint, following the restraintmanufacturer’s instructions. Besure the safety belt webbing is nottwisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latchinto the buckle. Listen for the dis-tinct “click” sound.

Position the release button so that itis easy to access in case of anemergency.

E2MS103005 E2BLD310

3 45

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


3. Pull the shoulder portion of thesafety belt all the way out. Whenthe shoulder portion of the safetybelt is fully extended, it will shiftthe retractor to the “Auto Lock”(child restraint) mode.

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portionof the safety belt to retract and lis-ten for an audible “clicking” or“ratcheting” sound. This indicatesthat the retractor is in the “AutoLock” mode. If no distinct sound isheard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Remove as much slack from thebelt as possible by pushing downon the child restraint system whilefeeding the shoulder belt back intothe retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraintsystem to confirm that the safetybelt is holding it firmly in place. If itis not, release the safety belt andrepeat steps 2 through 6.

"Click"

MMSA3029 MMSA3030MMSA3028


463

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

7. Double check that the retractor isin the “Auto Lock” mode byattempting to pull more of the safe-ty belt out of the retractor. If youcannot, the retractor is in the “AutoLock” mode.

To remove the child restraint, pressthe release button on the buckle andthen pull the lap/shoulder belt out ofthe restraint and allow the safety beltto retract fully.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen the safety belt is allowed toretract to its fully stowed position,the retractor will automaticallyswitch from the “Auto Lock” modeto the emergency lock mode for nor-mal adult usage.

Securing a child restraint seatwith “Tether Anchor” systemChild restraint hook holders arelocated on the shelf or floor behindthe rear seats.1. Open the tether anchor cover on

the shelf or floor behind the rearseats.

WARNING - Auto lockmode

The lap/shoulder belt automati-cally returns to the “emergencylock mode” whenever the belt isallowed to retract fully.Therefore, the preceding sevensteps must be followed eachtime a child restraint isinstalled.If the safety belt is not placed inthe “auto lock” mode, severeinjury or death could occur tothe child and/or other occupantsin the vehicle in a collision,since the child restraint will notbe effectively held in place.

1LDN3200/1LDN3200A

4 Door

5 Door

3 47

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


2. Route the child restraint seat strapover the seatback.For vehicles with adjustable head-rest, route the tether strap underthe headrest and between theheadrest posts, otherwise routethe tether strap over the top of theseatback.

3. Connect the tether strap hook tothe correct child restraint hookholder and tighten to secure theseat.

2GHN3300A

WARNINGIf the tether strap is securedincorrectly, the child restraintseat may not be restrainedproperly in the event of a colli-sion.

WARNING - Childrestraint

Check that the child restraintsystem is secure by pushingand pulling it in different direc-tions. Incorrectly fitted childrestraints may swing, twist, tipor come away causing death orinjury.

WARNING - Child restraint anchorage

• Child restraint anchorages aredesigned to withstand onlythose loads imposed by cor-rectly fitted child restraints.Under no circumstances arethey to be used for adult seatbelts or harnesses or forattaching other items orequipment to the vehicle.

• The tether strap may not workproperly if attached some-where other than the correcttether anchor.


483

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Child seat lower anchorsSome child seat manufacturersmake child restraint seats that arelabeled as International StandardsOrganization Fixed (ISOFIX) orISOFIX-compatible child restraintseats. These seats include two rigidor webbing mounted attachmentsthat connect to two ISOFIX anchorsat specific seating positions in yourvehicle. This type of child restraintseat eliminates the need to use seatbelts to attach the child seat in therear seats.

There is a symbol located on thelower portion of each side of the rearseatbacks. These symbols indicatethe position of the lower anchors forchild restraints so equipped.

1LDN3050 1LDN3100/1LDN3100A

Child lower anchor

Label WARNING When using the vehicle's"ISOFIX" system to install achild restraint system in the rearseat, all unused vehicle rearseat belt metal latch plates ortabs must be latched securely intheir seat belt buckles and theseat belt webbing must beretracted behind the childrestraint to prevent the childfrom reaching and taking holdof unretracted seat belts.Unlatched metal latch plates ortabs may allow the child toreach the unretracted seat beltswhich may result in strangula-tion and a serious injury ordeath to the child in the childrestraint.

3 49

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


ISOFIX anchors have been providedin your vehicle. The ISOFIX anchorsare located in the left and right out-board rear seating positions. Theirlocations are shown in the illustra-tion. There is no ISOFIX anchor pro-vided for the center rear seatingposition.The ISOFIX anchors are locatedbetween the seatback and the seatcushion of the rear seat left and rightoutboard seating positions. Followthe child seat manufacturer’s instruc-tions to properly install child restraintseats with ISOFIX or ISOFIX-com-patible attachments.

Once you have installed the ISOFIXchild restraint, assure that the seat isproperly attached to the ISOFIX andtether anchors. Also, test the childrestraint seat before you place thechild in it. Tilt the seat from side toside. Also try to tug the seat forward.Check to see if the anchors hold theseat in place.

WARNINGIf the child restraint is notanchored properly, the risk of achild being seriously injured orkilled in a collision greatlyincreases.

1LDN3100/SBGQ03102

WARNING• Do not mount more than one

child restraint to a single teth-er or to a child restraint loweranchorage point. The improp-er increased load may causethe anchorage points or tetheranchor to break, causing seri-ous injury or death.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not install a child restraint

seat at the rear center seatingposition using the vehicle’sISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIXanchors are only provided forthe left and right outboard rearseating positions. Do not mis-use the ISOFIX anchors byattempting to attach a childrestraint seat in the middlerear seating position to theISOFIX anchors. In a crash,the child restraint seat ISOFIXattachments may not bestrong enough to secure thechild restraint seat improperlyin the rear center seating posi-tion and may break, causingserious injury or death.

• Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child restraint seatonly to the appropriate loca-tions shown in the illustration.

• Always follow the installationand use instructions providedby the manufacturer of thechild restraint.


503

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

1JBN3511A/OMGA035047/OMGA035048/OMGA035049/OMGA035051/OMGA035052/OMGA035053/OMGA035055/OMGA035054/1LDN2166/1LDN2167/1LDN2168

1 2 3

5

4

7

(1) Driver’s air bag(2) Front passenger’s air bag(3) Side air bag*(4) Curtain air bag*(5) SRS Control Module(6) Side impact sensor*(7) Front impact sensor(8) Front seat position sensor(9) Occupant classification system* : if equipped

986

3 51

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


What your air bag systemdoesDriver’s air bag and front passen-ger’s air bag are designed to supple-ment the protection offered by thesafety belt in certain frontal colli-sions. Likewise, side air bag and cur-tain air bags are designed to supple-ment the protection offered by thesafety belt in side collisions. Safetybelts are designed to reduce theinjury of the driver or passengers incase of impact or collision. No safetybelt or air bag system can complete-ly eliminate injuries that may causein collisions or impacts. To helpreduce impact on driver or passen-gers in any collision, safety beltsmust be correctly worn.

What your air bag systemdoes not doThe air bag system is designed tosupplement the protection offered bythe safety belt system. IT IS NOT ASUBSTITUTE FOR THE SAFETYBELT.

The importance of using safety beltsThere are four very important rea-sons to use safety belts even with anair bag supplemental restraint sys-tem. They:• help keep you in the proper posi-

tion (away from the air bag) when itinflates.

• reduce the risk of harm in rollover,side impact (vehicles not equippedwith side and curtain air bags) orrear impact collisions, because anair bag is not designed to inflate insuch situations and even a sidecurtain air bag is designed toinflate only in certain side impactcollisions.

• reduce the risk of harm in frontal orside collisions which are notsevere enough to actuate the airbag supplemental restraint system.

• reduce the risk of being ejectedfrom your vehicle.


523

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

WARNING - Air bags &safety belts

• Even in vehicles with air bags,you and your passengersmust always wear the safetybelts provided in order to min-imize the risk and severity ofinjury in the event of a colli-sion or rollover.

• Always wear your safety belt.It can help keep you awayfrom the air bags during heavybraking just before a collision.It may also reduce the risk ofoccupant ejection.

• If occupants are not wearingsafety belts or correctly seat-ed, they cannot be protected,and thus face serious injury ordeath.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Driver’s and front passenger’s

air bag are designed to inflateonly in certain frontal colli-sions, and side and curtain airbags (if equipped) aredesigned to inflate in certainside impacts. Frontal air bagwill generally not provide pro-tection in side impacts (vehi-cles not equipped with sideand curtain air bags) or rearimpacts, rollovers, less severefrontal collisions.They will notprovide protection from laterimpacts in a multi-impact col-lision.

(Continued)

(Continued)• If your vehicle has been sub-

jected to flood conditions (e.g.soaked carpeting/standingwater on the floor of the vehi-cle, etc.) or if your vehicle hasbecome flood damaged in anyway, do not attempt to startthe vehicle or put the key inthe ignition before discon-necting the battery.Disregarding this precautionmay cause air bag deploy-ment, which could result inserious personal injury ordeath. If your vehicle is sub-jected to flooded conditions,before starting the vehicle,have the vehicle towed to anauthorized Kia dealer forinspection and necessaryrepairs.

3 53

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Air bag system components The main components of your SRSare:• To indicate that your vehicle is

equipped with air bags, the corre-sponding air bag covers aremarked with “SRS AIR BAG”.- Driver’s air bag - Passenger’s air bag - Side air bag - Curtain air bag

• A diagnostic system that continual-ly monitors the system operation.

• An indicator light to warn you of apossible problem with the system.

• Emergency power backup in caseyour car’s electrical system is dis-connected in a crash.

The SRS uses a collection of sen-sors to gather information about thedriver’s and front passenger’s seatposition, the driver’s and front pas-senger’s safety belt usage andimpact severity.The driver’s and front passenger’sseat position sensors, which areinstalled on the seat track, determineif the seats are fore or aft of a refer-ence position. Similarly, the safetybelt usage sensors determine if thedriver and front passenger’s safetybelts are fastened. These sensorsprovide the ability to control the SRSdeployment based on how close thedriver’s seat is to the steering wheel,how close the passenger’s seat is tothe instrument panel, whether or notthe safety belts are fastened, andhow severe is the impact.

The advanced SRS offers the abilityto control the air bag inflation withtwo levels. A first stage level is pro-vided for moderate-severity impacts.A second stage level is provided formore severe impacts.The SRSCM (SRS Control Module)controls the air bag inflation in accor-dance with impact severity, seatingposition and safety belt usage.Additionally, your SRS is equippedwith an occupant classification sys-tem in the front passenger’s seat.The occupant classification systemdetects the presence of a passengerin the front passenger’s seat and willturn off the front passenger’s air bagunder certain conditions. For moredetail, see “Occupant ClassificationSystem” later in this section.


543

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CAUTIONIf the seat position sensor is notworking properly, the SRS airbag warning light ( ) on theinstrument panel will illuminateeven if there is no malfunctionof the SRS air bag system,because the SRS air bag warn-ing light is connected with theseat position sensor. If the SRSair bag warning light does notilluminate when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, ifit remains illuminated afterblinking for approximately 6seconds, or if it illuminateswhile the vehicle is being driv-en, have an authorized Kia deal-er inspect the seat position sen-sor and the advanced SRS airbag system as soon as possi-ble.

WARNING• Modification to the seat struc-

ture can adversely affect theseat position sensor andcause the air bag to deploy ata different level than shouldbe provided.

• Failure to properly wear safetybelts can increase the risk orseverity of injury by causingthe air bags to deploy at a dif-ferent level than should beprovided.

• Do not place any objectsunderneath the front seatswhich could damage the seatposition sensor or interferewith the occupant classifica-tion system.

• Do not place any objects thatmay cause magnetic fieldsnear the front seat. These maycause a malfunction of theseat position sensor.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Ignoring the SRS indicator

light (air bag indicator andpassenger air bag off indica-tor) can result in serious orfatal injury if the air bagsoccupant classification sys-tem or pretensioners do notwork properly. Have your carchecked by a dealer as soonas possible if the SRS warninglight alerts you to a potentialproblem.

• Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousor fatal injury in a crash. Alloccupants should sit uprightin their seats with their feet onthe floor until the vehicle isparked and the ignition key isremoved.

3 55

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Driver’s air bagThe driver’s air bag is stored in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Front passenger’s air bagFront passenger’s air bag is stored inthe instrument panel on the glovebox.Since you cannot anticipate which airbags will deploy or from what direc-tion, never put any objects or orna-ments on the instrument panel.

WARNING• You must always sit as far

back from the steering wheelair bag as possible (chest atleast 250 mm (10 inches) awayfrom the steering wheel), whilestill maintaining a comfortableseating position for goodvehicle control, in order toreduce the risk of injury ordeath in a collision.

• Never place objects over theair bag storage compartmentsor between the air bags andyourself. Due to the speed andforce of the air bag inflation,such objects could hit yourbody at high speed and causesevere bodily injury and evendeath.

• Do not put stickers or orna-ments on the steering wheelcover. These may interferewith the deployment of the airbag.

HLZ2120

OLD026048 1LDA2049

HLZ2121


563

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Occupant classification systemThe occupant classification systemdetects the presence of a passengerin the front passenger's seat and willturn off the front passenger's air bagunder certain conditions.The occupant classification system isdesigned to detect the presence of aproperly-seated occupant and deter-mine if the front passenger's air bagshould be enabled (may inflate) ornot.Only the front passenger air bag iscontrolled by the OccupantClassification System.

Main components of occupantclassification system• A detection device located within

the front passenger seat cushion.• Electronic system to determine

whether passenger air bag systemshould be activated or deactivated.

• A indicator light located on theinstrument panel which illuminatesthe words "PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF" indicating the frontal passen-ger air bag system is deactivated.

• The instrument panel air bag warn-ing light is interconnected with theoccupant classification system.

If there is no passenger in the frontpassenger seat or if the passenger inthe front passenger seat is very light,(such as a child), the front PASSEN-GER AIR BAG OFF indicator mayilluminate.When this indicator is ON, the frontpassenger front air bag will notdeploy.

1LDN2166 OLD036150N

The location of OCS Indicator

3 57

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Always be sure that you and all vehi-cle occupants are seated andrestrained properly (sitting uprightwith the seat in an upright position,centered on the seat cushion, withthe person's legs comfortablyextended, feet on the floor, and wear-ing the safety belt properly) for themost effective protection by the airbag and the safety belt.• The OCS may not function proper-

ly if the passenger takes actionswhich can defeat the detection sys-tem. These include:

(1) Failing to sit in an upright posi-tion.

(2) Leaning against the door or cen-ter console.

(3) Sitting towards the sides or thefront of the seat.

(4) Putting legs on the dashboard orresting them on other locationswhich reduce the passengerweight on the front seat.

(5) Improperly wearing the safetybelt.

(6) Reclining the seat back.

• The “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”indicator illuminates after the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion or after the engine is started. Ifthe front passenger's seat is occu-pied by a very small person or isoccupied by someone who isimproperly seated, the “PASSEN-GER AIR BAG OFF” indicator willremain illuminated and the frontpassenger air bag will not deploy infrontal crashes. If the front passen-ger’s seat is occupied by an adultsize person seated properly, the“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indi-cator will turn off after approxi-mately 4 seconds and the frontpassenger's air bag will deploy infrontal collision.

CAUTION If the occupant classificationsystem is not working properly,the air bag warning light ( ) onthe instrument panel will illumi-nate. If there is a malfunction ofthe occupant classification sys-tem, the "PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF" indicator will not illumi-nate and the front passenger'sair bag will deploy in frontalcrashes even if there is child orno occupant in the front pas-senger’s seat. If the SRS air bagwarning light does not illumi-nate when the ignition key isturned to "ON" position, if itremains illuminated after blink-ing for approximately six sec-onds, or if it illuminates whilethe vehicle is being driven, havean authorized Kia dealer inspectthe occupant classification sys-tem with the SRS air bag systemas soon as possible.


583

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Condition detected bythe occupant classifi-

cation system

1. Adult *1

2. Child*2 or childrestraint system

3. Unoccupied

Off

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Activated

Deactivated

Deactivated

"PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator

lightSRS warning light

Front passenger frontair bag

Indicator/Warning light Devices

*1 The system detects a person who is generally adult size as an adult, thus allowingthe passenger air bag to deploy. When a smaller adult sits in the front passengerseat, the system may detect their body shape as that of a child, thus preventing airbag deployment.

*2 When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front pas-senger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/herphysique sitting posture, or objects in the lap of the occupant, thus permitting airbagdeployment.

CAUTION If the "PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF" indicator illuminates orblinks continuously when a per-son of adult size sits in the frontpassenger's seat, it could bebecause that person isn't sittingproperly in the seat. If this hap-pens, turn the vehicle off, makesure the seat back is notreclined, have the passengercenter on the seat cushion, withlegs comfortably extended, andthe safety belt properly posi-tioned. Restart the vehicle andhave the person remain in thisposition long enough to allowthe system to detect the personand activate the passenger airbag.

3 59

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


(Continued)• If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG

OFF" indicator is illuminatedwhen the front passenger'sseat is occupied by a personof adult size who is seatedproperly, or if the "PASSEN-GER AIR BAG OFF" indicatoris not illuminated when thefront passenger's seat isunoccupied or occupied by avery small person, the occu-pant classification system isnot working properly. Haveyour vehicle immediatelyinspected by your Kia dealer ifthe occupant classificationsystem is not working proper-ly.

(Continued)

(Continued)• If a very low weight adult is

seated in the front passengerseat, the occupant classifica-tion system may or may notturn off the right front passen-ger air bag, depending uponthe person's seating positionand body type. Everyone inyour vehicle should wear asafety belt properly -- whetheror not there is an air bag forthat person.

• If the front seat passengerchanges their seating position(for example, by not sittingupright, by sitting on the edgeof the seat, or by otherwisebeing out of position), the"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator may be turned on,and the passenger air bagmay not deploy in a collision.Always be sure to sit properlyin the front passenger seatand wear the safety belt prop-erly.

(Continued)

WARNINGIf the front passenger seatshould be modified for personswith disabilities that may affectthe operation of the occupantclassification system, contactan authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING• Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the occupantclassification system, do notinstall a child restraint systemin the front passenger seat.The child could be severelyinjured or killed if the air bagdeploys. Children are affordedthe most protection in theevent of an accident whenthey are restrained by theproper restraint system in therear seat.

(Continued)


603

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1KMN3663

1KMN3664

- Never sit with hips shiftedtowards the front of the seat.

- Never lean on the center con-sole.

- Never sit on one side of thefront passenger seat.

(Continued)

(Continued)

1KMN3665

1KMN3666

- Always sit in a proper seatingposition.

- Never place feet on the dash-board.

1KMN3661

1KMN3662

- Never put a heavy load in thefront passenger seat.

- Never excessively recline thefront passenger seatback.

3 61

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


✽✽ NOTICE• If luggage or other objects are

placed on the front passenger'sseat or if the temperature of theseat changes while the seat is unoc-cupied, the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator may blink.These conditions do not indicate aproblem.

• Do not put heavy objects on thefront passenger's seat. This maycause front passenger air bagdeployment in the event of an acci-dent, thus increasing your repaircosts.

WARNING - Front passen-ger seating

• The front seat passenger airbag is much larger than thesteering wheel air bag andinflates with considerablymore force. It can seriouslyhurt or kill a passenger who isnot in the proper position andwearing the safety belt proper-ly. The front passengersshould always move their seatas far back as practical and sitback in their seat.

• It is essential that the frontpassengers always wear theirsafety belts when vehicle is inmotion, even when the vehicleis moving in a parking lot orup a driveway into garage.

(Continued)

(Continued) • Do not modify or replace the

front passenger seat. This willdisable the OCS unless a prop-er Kia replacement seat is used.

• Do not place sharp objects onthe front passenger seat.These can damage the occu-pant classification system, ifthey puncture the seat cush-ion.

• Do not install accessory seatcovers on the front seats,since these will interfere withproper sensor operation.


623

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Side air bag (if equipped)Side air bags are stored in the leftside of the driver’s seat and right sideof the front passenger’s seat.If air bag inflation conditions are met(side collision), they will inflate.

1LDA2056

1LDN2050/1LDN2051

(Continued)• If the driver brakes the vehicle

heavily prior to an impact,unbelted occupants will bethrown forward. If the frontpassenger is not wearing thesafety belts, they will bedirectly in front of the air bagwhen deployment occurs. Inthat situation, serious injuryor death is possible.

• Never allow front passengerto put their hands, feet or faceon or close to the instrumentpanel. In the event of air bagdeployment, such a misposi-tioned occupant would belikely to suffer severe injury ordeath.

• Never allow children, pregnantwomen or weak persons to sitin the front passenger seat.They may be seriously injuredby the air bag inflation whenair bag deploys.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Never allow children, pregnant

women or weak persons to sitin the front passenger seat.Do not put child restraint sys-tem on the front passenger'sseat either. They may be seri-ously injured by the airbaginflation when airbag deploys.

• Do not put objects or stickerson the instrument panel. Donot apply any accessory to thefront windshield. Do not installaftermarket mirrors or acces-sories on the factory-installedrearview mirror. Any of thesecould interfere with thedeployment of the air bag orcould hit your body at highspeed and cause severe bodi-ly injury and even death.

3 63

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Curtain air bag (if equipped)Curtain air bags are located alongboth sides of the roof rails above thefront and rear doors.They are designed to help protect theheads of the front seat occupantsand the rear outboard seat occupantsin certain side impact collisions.

• The curtain air bag deploymentoccurs only on the side of the vehi-cle affected by the impact.

• The side air bags (side and curtainair bags) are not designed todeploy during collisions from thefront or rear of the vehicle or inmost rollover situations.

• The curtain air bags are designedto deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on thecrash severity, angle, speed andimpact.

WARNING• Do not use any accessory

seat covers for the vehicleequipped with side air bags.Use of seat covers could inter-fere with side air bag deploy-ment.If seat is damaged, have thevehicle checked and repairedby an authorized Kia dealer.Inform them that your vehicleis equipped with side air bagsand an occupant detectionsystem.

• Do not make modifications oradditions to the seats as theymay cause the air bag systemto malfunction resulting insevere personal injury ordeath.

1LDA2052

1LDA2057


643

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

WARNING - Side and cur-tain air bags

• In order for side and curtainair bags to provide the bestprotection, both front seatoccupants and both outboardrear occupants should sit inan upright position with thesafety belts properly fastened.Importantly, children shouldsit in a proper child restraintsystem in the rear seat.

• When children are seated inthe rear outboard seats, theymust be seated in the properchild restraint system. Makesure to put the child restraintsystem as far away from thedoor side as possible, andsecure the child restraint sys-tem in a locked position.

(Continued)

(Continued)• If a small child is seated on

the rear outboard seat cush-ion, it is probable that they willbelow the deployment level ofthe side curtain airbag andthus not protected by thatairbag.

• Do not allow the passengersto lean their heads or bodiesonto doors, put their arms onthe doors, stretch their armsout of the window, or placeobjects between the doorsand passengers when they areseated on seats equipped withside air bags.

• Never try to open or repair anycomponents of the side cur-tain air bag system. Thisshould only be done by anauthorized Kia dealer.

Failure to follow the above men-tioned instructions can result insevere injury or death to thevehicle occupants in an acci-dent.

3 65

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Why didn’t my air bag go off ina collision? (Inflation and non-inflation condi-tions of the air bag)There are many types of accidents inwhich the air bag would not beexpected to provide additional pro-tection.These include rear impacts, secondor third collisions in multiple impactaccidents, as well as low speedimpacts. In other words, just becauseyour vehicle is damaged and even ifit is totally unusable, don’t be sur-prised that the air bags did notinflate.

1JBA3512A/OMG035052/OMG035054/OMG035053/OMG035055

1 2 3

Air bag collision sensors(1) SRS control module(2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensor (if equipped)


663

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Air bag inflation conditionFront air bag Front air bags (driver’s and front pas-senger’s air bags) are designed toinflate when the impact is deliveredto front collision sensors dependingon the intensity, speed or angles ofimpact of the front collision - general-ly from an area a little to the left to alittle to the right of straight ahead.

WARNING• Do not hit or allow any objects

to impact the locations whereair bag or sensors areinstalled.This may cause unexpectedair bag deployment, whichcould result in serious per-sonal injury or death.

• If the installation location orangle of the sensors is alteredin any way, the air bags maydeploy when they should notor they may not deploy whenthey should, causing severeinjury or death.Therefore, do not try to per-form maintenance on oraround the air bag sensors.Have the vehicle checked andrepaired by an authorized Kiadealer.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Problems may arise if the sen-

sor installation angles arechanged due to the deforma-tion of front bumper, body orB, C pillar where side collisionsensors are installed. Havethe vehicle checked andrepaired by an authorized Kiadealer.

• Your vehicle has beendesigned to absorb impactand deploy the air bag(s) incertain collisions. Installingaftermarket bumper guards orreplacing a bumper with non-genuine parts may adverselyaffect your vehicles collisionand air bag deployment per-formance.

1LDA2059

3 67

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Side air bag (if equipped)Side air bags (side and curtain airbags) are designed to inflate whenan impact is detected by side colli-sion sensors depending on thestrength, speed or angles of impactof side impact collision or rollover bythe side impact.

Although the front air bags (driver’sand front passenger’s air bags) aredesigned to inflate only in frontal col-lision, it may inflate in any collision iffront impact sensors detect a suffi-cient impact. Side air bags (side andcurtain air bags) are designed toinflate only in side impact collision, itmay inflate in any collision if sideimpact sensors detect a sufficientimpact.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted bybumps or objects on unimprovedroads or sidewalks, air bags maydeploy. Drive carefully on unim-proved roads or on surfaces notdesigned for vehicle traffic.To protect occupants, front air bagsor pre-tensioner safety belts maydeploy in certain side impact colli-sions.

1JBA3514

OUN026090


683

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Air bag non-inflation conditions• In certain collisions, the vehicle

safety belts are sufficient to protectthe vehicle occupants and the airbags may not deploy. In somecases, deploying air bags in low-speed collisions can cause a sec-ondary impact to the occupants(light abrasions, cuts, burns, etc.),or loss of vehicle control.

• Frontal air bags are not designedto inflate in rear collisions, becauseoccupants are moved backward bythe force of the impact. In this case,the air bags do not provide properprotection.

• Front air bags may not inflate inside impact collision, becauseoccupants move to the direction ofthe collision, and thus in sideimpacts, frontal air bag deploymentdoes not provide occupant protec-tion.However, side or curtain air bagsmay inflate depending on the inten-sity, vehicle speed and angles ofimpact.

1GHA22731LDA2061 1JBA3516

3 69

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


• In a slant impact or collision, theforce delivered will be relativelyweaker than that of frontal colli-sion. So, the air bags may notinflate.

• At the moment of an accident, driv-ers often brake heavily with reflex.In such heavy braking, the frontportion of the vehicle is lowered bythe force of the braking and thevehicle can dive under a vehiclewith a higher ground clearance. Airbags may not inflate in this situa-tion because impacts may not bedelivered or may be delivered withless intensity.

• Air bags may not inflate in rolloveraccidents because air bag deploy-ment would not provide proper pro-tection to the occupants.However, side air bags may inflatewhen the vehicle is rolled over by aside impact collision, if the vehicleis equipped with side air bags andcurtain air bags.

1GHA2270 1LDA2065 1LDA2066


703

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-cle collides with objects such asutility poles or trees, where thepoint of impact is concentrated toone area and the full force of theimpact is not delivered to the sen-sors.

How does the air bag systemoperate • Air bag only operates when the

ignition switch is turned to the ONor START positions.

• Air bags inflate instantly in theevent of serious frontal or side col-lision (if equipped with side air bagor curtain air bag) in order to helpprotect the occupants from seriousphysical injury.

• There is no single speed at whichthe air bags will inflate.Generally, air bags are designed toinflate by the severity of a collisionand its direction. These two factorsdetermine whether the sensorssend out an electronic deploy-ment/inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on anumber of factors including vehiclespeed, angles of impact and thedensity and stiffness of the vehi-cles or objects which your vehiclehits in the collision. Though, factorsare not limited to those mentionedabove.

• The front air bags will completelyinflate and deflate in an instant.It is impossible for you to see theair bags inflate during an accident.It is much more likely that you willsimply see the deflated air bagshanging out of their storage com-partments after the collision.

1JBA3518

3 71

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


• In order to help provide protectionin a severe collision, the air bagsmust inflate rapidly. The speed ofair bag inflation is a consequenceof the extremely short time in whicha collision occurs and the need toget the air bag between the occu-pant and the vehicle structuresbefore the occupant impacts thosestructures. This speed of inflationreduces the risk of serious or life-threatening injuries in a severe col-lision and is thus a necessary partof air bag design.However, air bag inflation can alsocause injuries which normally caninclude facial abrasions, bruisesand broken bones, and sometimesmore serious injuries because theinflation speed also causes the airbags to expand with a great deal offorce.

• There are even circumstancesunder which contact with thesteering wheel air bag can causefatal injuries, especially if theoccupant is positioned exces-sively close to the steeringwheel.

Noise and smokeWhen the air bags inflate, they makea loud noise and they leave smokeand powder in the air inside of thevehicle. This is normal and is a resultof the ignition of the air bag inflator.After the air bag inflates, you mayfeel substantial discomfort in breath-ing due to the contact of your chestto both the safety belt and the airbag, as well as from breathing thesmoke and powder. We stronglyurge you to open your doorsand/or windows as soon as possi-ble after impact in order to reducediscomfort and prevent prolongedexposure to the smoke and pow-der.Though smoke and powder are non-toxic, it may cause irritation to theskin (eyes, nose and throat etc).Wash and rinse with the cold waterimmediately and consult the doctor ifthe symptom persists.

WARNING• To avoid severe personal

injury or death caused bydeploying air bags in a colli-sion, the driver should sit asfar back from the steeringwheel air bag as possible (atleast 250 mm (10 inches)away). The front passengershould always move their seatas far back as possible and sitback in their seat.

• Air bag inflates instantly in anevent of collision, passengersmay be injured by the air bagexpansion force if they are notin proper position.

• Air bag inflation may causeinjuries which normallyinclude facial or bodily abra-sions, injuries by the brokenglasses or burns by the explo-sives.


723

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Installing a child restraint on afront passenger seat isextremely dangerous andshould never be done.Never place a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passenger seat.If the air bag deploys, it would impactthe rear-facing child restraint, caus-ing severe or fatal injury.In addition, do not place front-facingchild restraint in the front passen-ger’s seat either. If the front passen-ger air bag inflates, it would causeserious or fatal injuries to the improp-erly positioned or improperlyrestrained child.

WARNING• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a

rearward facing child restrainton a seat protected by an airbag in front of it!

• Never put child restraint in thefront passenger’s seat. If thefront passenger air baginflates, it would cause seri-ous or fatal injuries.

• When children are seated inthe rear outboard seats inwhich curtain air bags areequipped, be sure to put thechild restraint system as faraway from the door side aspossible, and secure the childrestraint system to be lockedin position.Inflation of curtain air bag (ifequipped) could cause severeinjury or death due to theexpansion impact.

WARNINGWhen the air bags deploy, theair bag related parts in steeringwheel and/or instrument paneland/or in both sides of the roofrails above the front and reardoors are very hot. To preventinjury, do not touch the air bagstorage areas internal compo-nents immediately after an airbag has inflated. 1JBH3051

3 73

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Air bag warning lightThe purpose of air bag warning lightin your instrument panel is to alertyou of a potential problem with yourair bag - Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS).

When the ignition switch is turnedON, the indicator light should blink orilluminate for approximately 6 sec-onds, then go off.Have the system checked if:• The light does not turn on briefly

when you turn the ignition ON.• The light stays on after the engine

starts.• The light comes on while the vehi-

cle is in motion.

Air bag (SupplementalRestraint System) service Your Supplemental Restraint Systemis virtually maintenance-free. Thereare no parts which you can service.You must have the system servicedunder the following circumstances:• If an air bag ever inflates, the air

bag must be replaced. Do not try toremove or discard the air bag byyourself. This must be done by anauthorized Kia dealer.

• If the air bag warning indicator lightalerts you to a problem, have theair bag system checked as soon aspossible. Otherwise, your air bagsystem may be ineffective.

A-BAG-W


743

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Repairing or scrapping the vehi-cles • Repairing steering wheel, instru-

ment panel, center console orroofs, or installing car audio aroundcenter console or painting frontmetal sheet could disable the airbag system. Have them checkedby an authorized Kia dealer.

• When leaving the vehicle at anauthorized Kia dealer, inform thefacility that the vehicle is equippedwith air bag system, and leave theowner’s manual in the vehicle.

• Since air bag system containsexplosive chemical substances,contact an authorized Kia dealerwhen scrapping the vehicle.

CAUTION Do not modify any part of theSupplemental Restraint System.Modification could make the airbag system ineffective or couldcause unnecessary deploy-ment.

WARNING• Do not modify your steering

wheel, seat or any other partof the Supplemental RestraintSystem. Modification couldmake the system inoperable.

• Do not work on the system’scomponents or wiring. Thiscould cause the air bags toinflate inadvertently, possiblyseriously injuring someone.Working on the system couldalso disable the system sothat the air bags would notdeploy in a collision.

• Any work on the SRS system,such as removing, installing,repairing, or any work on thesteering wheel must be per-formed by a qualified Kia tech-nician. Improper handling ofthe air bag system may resultin serious personal injury ordeath.

3 75

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Airbag warning labelAirbag warning labels which are now required by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS) areattached to alert driver and passengers of potential risk of airbag system.Note that these government warnings focus on the risk to children, Kia also wants you to be aware of the risks whichadults are exposed to. Those have been described in previous pages.

OLD036901N/1LDN2069A/1LDN2074/1LDE2069

(if equipped) (if equipped)


763

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Outside the vehicle• To open the trunk, insert the key

into the lock and turn it clockwise(1).

• To close the trunk, use both handsto push the trunk lid down. Checkto see if the trunk is completelyshut.

• Trunk can be opened with transmit-ter (if equipped).

Trunk room lampTrunk room lamp turns on when thetrunk is opened. It remains on untilthe trunk is securely closed.

Inside the vehicleTo open the trunk from inside thevehicle push trunk lid release switch.

TRUNK (IF EQUIPPED)

1LDA2015OLD026014

CAUTIONMake sure to close the trunksecurely. If it remains openwhile engine is not running, itmay cause battery dischargebecause trunk room lampremains on.

OLD026016N

3 77

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Emergency trunk safetyrelease (if equipped)Your vehicle is equipped with anemergency trunk release cable locat-ed inside the trunk. The lever glowsin the dark when the trunk lid isclosed. If someone is inadvertentlylocked in the trunk, pulling this han-dle will release the trunk latch mech-anism and open the trunk.

WARNING - Exhaustfumes

If you drive with the trunk lidopen, you will draw dangerousexhaust fumes into your vehiclecausing serious injury or deathto vehicle occupants. Opentrunk lids can also dangerouslyobscure rear view vision.If you must drive with the trunklid open, keep the air vents openso that additional outside aircomes into the vehicle.

OLD026017

WARNINGNo one should be allowed tooccupy the trunk of the vehicleat any time. If the trunk is par-tially or totally latched and theperson is unable to get out,severe injury or death couldoccur due to lack of ventilation,exhaust fumes and rapid heatbuild-up, or because of expo-sure to cold weather conditions.The trunk is also a highly dan-gerous location in the event of acrash because it is not a pro-tected occupant space butmerely a part of the vehicle’scrush zone.


783

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Opening the hood:1. Pull the release lever on the lower

left side of the instrument panel tounlatch the hood. The hood shouldpop open slightly.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle,slightly raise the hood, push thesecondary latch (1) inside of thehood center and lift (2) the hood.

WARNING • If a person is locked in the

trunk, they can pull the emer-gency release to open thetrunk lid.

• We recommend that cars bekept locked and keys be keptout of the reach of children,and that parents teach theirchildren about the dangers ofplaying in trunks.

HOOD

1LDA2020 OLD026023

3 79

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


3. Lift the hood and hold it open withthe prop rod by inserting the freeend of the rod into the slot in thehood.

Closing the hood1. Before closing the hood, check the

following:• All filler caps in engine compart-

ment must be correctly installed.• Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must beremoved from the engine com-partment.

2. Secure the support rod in its clip.3. Lower the hood to about 30 cm

(12 inches) height and then let itdrop to properly lock in place.Make sure the hood is properlylocked before driving.

1LDA2166

WARNING Handle the support rod in thearea wrapped in rubber.The rub-ber will help prevent you frombeing burned by hot metal whenthe engine is hot.

WARNING • Before closing the hood, make

sure that all engine parts andtools have been removed fromthe engine area and that noone’s hands are near the hoodopening.

• Do not leave gloves, rags orany other combustible materi-al in the engine compartment.Doing so may cause a heat-induced fire.


803

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

WARNINGIf pressurized fuel sprays out, itcan cause serious injuries.Always remove the fuel capcarefully and slowly. If the cap isventing fuel or if you hear ahissing sound, wait until thecondition stops before com-pletely removing the cap.

1. Stop the engine.2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the

release lever.

3. Pull the fuel filler lid out to open.4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel

tank cap counterclockwise.5. Refuel as needed.6. To install the cap, turn it clockwise

until it “clicks”. This indicates thatthe cap is securely tightened.

7. Close the fuel filler lid and push itlightly and make sure that it issecurely closed.

FUEL FILLER LID

1LDA2019OLD026018

WARNING To avoid injury from sharpedges, it is recommended thatprotective gloves be worn ifthere is a need to open the fuelfiller door manually.

WARNINGAutomotive fuels are flamma-ble/explosive materials. Whenrefueling, please note the fol-lowing guidelines carefully.Failure to follow these guide-lines may result in severe per-sonal injury, severe burns ordeath by fire or explosion.• Before refueling always note

the location of the EmergencyGasoline Shut-Off, if available,at the gas station facility.

(Continued)

3 81

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


(Continued)• Before touching the fuel noz-

zle or fuel filler cap, youshould eliminate potentiallydangerous static electricitydischarge by touching anoth-er metal part of the front of thevehicle, a safe distance awayfrom the fuel filler neck, noz-zle, or other gas source.

• Do not get back into a vehicleonce you have begun refuel-ing. Do not touch, rub or slideagainst any item or fabric(polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)capable of producing staticelectricity. Static electricitydischarge can ignite fuelvapors resulting in explosion.If you must re-enter the vehi-cle, you should once againeliminate potentially danger-ous static electricity dis-charge by touching a metalpart of the vehicle, away fromthe fuel filler neck, nozzle orother gasoline source.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When using a portable fuel

container be sure to place thecontainer on the ground priorto refueling. Static electricitydischarge from the containercan ignite fuel vapors causinga fire. Once refueling hasbegun, contact with the vehi-cle should be maintained untilthe filling is complete. Useonly portable fuel containersdesigned to carry and storegasoline.

• Do not use cellular phonesaround a gas station or whilerefueling any vehicle. Electriccurrent and/or electronicinterference from cellularphones can potentially ignitefuel vapors causing a fire. Ifyou must use your cellularphone, use it in a place awayfrom the gas station.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When refueling always shut

the engine off. Sparks pro-duced by electrical compo-nents related to the enginecan ignite fuel vapors causinga fire. Always insure that theengine is OFF before and dur-ing refueling. Once refuelingis complete, check to makesure the fuel filler cap anddoor are securely closed,before starting the engine.

• Do not light any fire around agas station. DO NOT usematches or a lighter and DONOT SMOKE or leave a lit cig-arette in your vehicle while ata gas station especially duringrefueling. Automotive fuel ishighly flammable and can,when ignited, result in explo-sion by flames.

(Continued)


823

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Auto fuel cutoff switch (if equipped)The auto fuel cutoff switch is locatedon the driver’s side of the enginecompartment. In the event of a colli-sion or sudden impact, the auto fuelcutoff device cuts off the fuel supply.If this device is activated, it must bereset by pressing in on the top of theswitch before the engine can berestarted.

(Continued)• If a fire breaks out during refu-

eling, leave the vicinity of thevehicle, and immediately con-tact the manager of the gasstation or contact the policeand local fire department.Follow any safety instructionsthey provide.

(Continued)• If the fuel filler cap requires

replacement, use only a gen-uine Kia cap or the equivalentspecified for your vehicle. Anincorrect fuel filler cap canresult in a serious malfunctionof the fuel system or emissioncontrol system. Correctreplacement caps are avail-able at authorized Kia dealers.

• Do not spill fuel on the exteri-or surfaces of the vehicle. Anytype of fuel spilled on paintedsurfaces may damage thepaint.

• A loose fuel filler cap maycause the “Check Engine”(Malfunction Indicator) light inthe instrument panel to illumi-nate unnecessarily.

• If the fuel filler lid will not openin cold weather because thearea around it is frozen, pushor lightly tap the lid.

CAUTION• Make sure to refuel with gaso-

line (unleaded fuel) only forthe gasoline engine vehicles.

• Check to make sure the fuelfiller cap is securely closedafter refueling.

(Continued)

OLD026020

WARNINGBefore resetting the auto fuelcutoff switch, the fuel lineshould be checked for fuelleaks.

3 83

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Outside rearview mirror Be sure to adjust mirror anglesbefore driving.Your vehicle is equipped with bothleft-hand and right-hand outsiderearview mirrors. The mirrors caneither be adjusted remotely with thecontrol levers or remote switch,depending on the type your vehiclehas. The mirror heads can be foldedback to prevent damage when usingan automatic car wash or passing ina narrow street.

MIRRORS

CAUTIONDo not scrape ice off the mirrorface; this may damage the sur-face of the glass. If ice shouldrestrict movement of the mirror,do not force the mirror foradjustment. To remove ice, usea deicer spray, or a sponge orsoft cloth with very warm water.

WARNING • The right outside rearview

mirror is convex. Objects seenin the mirror are closer thanthey appear.

• Use your interior rearview mir-ror or direct observation todetermine the actual distanceof following vehicles whenchanging lanes.


843

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Manual remote control (if equipped)To adjust an outside mirror, move thecontrol lever which is located at theforward inside area of the windowframe.

Electric remote control (if equipped)The electric remote control mirrorswitch allows you to adjust the posi-tion of the left and right outsiderearview mirrors. To adjust the posi-tion of either mirror, move the lever(1) to R or L to select the right sidemirror or the left side mirror, thenpress a corresponding point (•) onthe mirror adjustment control to posi-tion the selected mirror up, down, leftor right.After adjustment, put the lever intoneutral position to prevent the inad-vertent adjustment.

1LDN2080

➀ CAUTION• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximumadjusting angles, but themotor continues to operatewhile the switch is depressed.Do not depress the switchlonger than necessary, themotor may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust theoutside rearview mirror byhands. Doing so may damagethe parts.

1LDA2081

3 85

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Folding the outside rearview mirrorManual typeTo fold outside rearview mirror, graspthe housing of mirror and then fold ittoward the rear of the vehicle.

Outside rearview mirror heater (if equipped) The outside rearview mirror heater isactuated in connection with the rearwindow defroster. To heat the outsiderearview mirror glass, push the but-ton for the rear window defroster.The outside rearview mirror glass willbe heated for defrosting or defoggingand will give you improved rearvision in inclement weather condi-tions. Push the button again to turnthe heater off. The outside rearviewmirror heater automatically turns offafter 20 minutes.

Day/night rearview mirror Adjust the rearview mirror to centeron the view through the rear window.Make this adjustment before youstart driving.

WARNING Do not place objects in the rearseat or cargo area which wouldinterfere with your vision outthe rear window.1LDA2083


863

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Manual type Make this adjustment before youstart driving and while the day/nightlever is in the day position.Pull the day/night lever toward you toreduce glare from the headlights ofvehicles behind you during nightdriving.Remember that you lose somerearview clarity in the night position.

Electric type (if equipped)When the engine is running, theglare is automatically controlled bythe sensor mounted in the rearviewmirror.The sensor mounted in the mirrorsenses the light level around the vehi-cle, and through a chemical reaction,automatically controls the headlightglare from vehicles behind you.Whenever the shift lever is shiftedinto reverse (R), the mirror will auto-matically go to the brightest setting inorder to improve the drivers viewbehind the vehicle.

When the ignition switch is ON, theautomatic-dimming function will turnon automatically.Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turnthe automatic-dimming function off.The mirror indicator light will turn off.Press the ON/OFF button (1) onceagain to turn the automatic-dimmingfunction on. The mirror indicator lightwill illuminate.

1LDA2078

Day Night

Day/Night lever

1KMA3084➀ SensorIndicator

CAUTIONWhen cleaning the mirror, use apaper towel or similar materialdampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleanerdirectly on the mirror as thatmay cause the liquid cleaner toenter the mirror housing.

3 87

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Map light Front (if equipped)The lights are turned ON or OFF bypressing the corresponding switch.

Dome light (if equipped)(1) OFF - The light stays off even

when a door is open.(2) DOOR - The light turns on when a

door is opened or when a door isunlocked by the transmitter (ifequipped). Interior light goes outslowly after 30 seconds if thedoor is closed. However if theignition switch is ON or all vehicledoors are locked when the door isclosed, interior light will turn offeven within 30 seconds.

(3) ON - The light turns on and stayson even when the doors are allclosed.

Door courtesy lamp (if equipped)The door courtesy lamp comes ONwhen the door is opened to assistentering or exiting the vehicle. It alsoserves as a warning to passing vehi-cles that the vehicle door is open.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

1LDA2113

OLD026111

OLD026112

Type A

Type B1LDN3202


883

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Center console storageTo open either of the console storagecompartments, push the button (1) orpull up the lever (2).These compartments can be used tostore small items required by thedriver or front passenger.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

WARNING - Flammablematerials

Do not store cigarette lighters,propane cylinders, or otherflammable/explosive materialsin the vehicle. These items maycatch fire and/or explode if thevehicle is exposed to hot tem-peratures for extended periods.

OLD026151

CAUTION• To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storagecompartment.

• Always keep the storage com-partment covers closed whiledriving. Do not attempt toplace many items in the stor-age compartment that thestorage compartment covercan not close securely.

3 89

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Glove boxTo open the glove box, pull the han-dle (1) then the glove box will auto-matically open (2). Close the glovebox after use.

Sunglass holder A sunglass storage compartment isprovided on the overhead console.To open the sunglass holder, pressthe cover and the holder will slowlyopen. Place your sunglasses in thecompartment door with the lensesfacing out. Push to close.

1LDA2156

CAUTION Since key is not fully insertedinto the glove box key set, donot apply excessive force.Doing so may damage the parts.

CAUTION Make sure the sunglass holderis closed while driving.

1LDA2159


903

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Cigarette lighterFrontTo operate the cigarette lighter, pressit in and release it. When it is heated,it automatically pops out ready foruse.If the engine is not running, the igni-tion switch must be in the ACC posi-tion for the lighter to operate.

AshtrayFront The front ashtray may be opened bypushing in the ashtray lid. To cleanthe ashtray, the plastic receptacleshould be removed by lifting the plas-tic ash receptacle upward and pullingit out.

INTERIOR FEATURES

WARNING - Ashtray use• Do not use the vehicle’s ash-

trays as waste receptacles.• Putting lit cigarettes or match-

es in an ashtray with othercombustible materials maycause a fire.

OLD026148 OLD026147

CAUTION• Do not hold the lighter in after

it is already heated because itwill overheat.

• Only a genuine Kia lightershould be used in the ciga-rette lighter socket. The use ofplug-in accessories (shavers,hand-held vacuums, and cof-fee pots, for example) maydamage the socket or causeelectrical failure.

• If the lighter does not pop outwithin 30 seconds, remove itto prevent overheating.

3 91

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Cup holder

FrontCups or small beverage cans may beplaced in the cup holders.

Rear (if equipped)To use cup holders in rear seat, pullthe rear cup holder cover (1) out.Push the cover to close after use.

WARNING - Hot liquids• Do not place uncovered cups

of hot liquid in the cup holderwhile the vehicle is in motion.If the hot liquid spills, youcould be burned. Such a burnto the driver could cause aloss of control of the vehicle.

• To reduce the risk of personalinjury in the event of suddenstop or collision, do not placeuncovered or insecure bot-tles, glasses, cans, etc., in thecup holder while the vehicle isin motion.

OLD026153OLD026152

CAUTIONDo not place heavy cups orcans in cup holders. Cup hold-ers could be damaged.


923

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

SunvisorUse the sunvisor to shield direct lightthrough the front or side windows.To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.To use a sunvisor for a side window,pull it downward, unsnap it from thebracket (1) and swing it to the side.To use the vanity mirror, pull downthe visor and pull up the mirror cover(2).

Power socket (if equipped)The power outlets are designed toprovide power for mobile telephonesor other devices designed to operatewith vehicle electrical systems. Thedevices should draw less than 10amps with the engine running.

1LDN2151 OLD026150

CAUTIONClose the vanity mirror coversecurely and return the sunvi-sor to its original position afteruse. If the vanity mirror is notclosed securely, the lamp (ifequipped) will stay on and couldresult in battery discharge andpossible sunvisor damage.

3 93

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Digital clock (if equipped)Whenever the battery terminals,ROOM fuse, or Power Connect aredisconnected, you must reset thetime.When the ignition switch is in theACC or ON position, the clock but-tons operate as follows:

• HOUR:Pressing the “H” button with yourfinger, a pencil or similar object willadvance the time displayed by onehour.

• MINUTE:Pressing the “M” button with yourfinger, a pencil or similar object willadvance the time displayed by oneminute.

• RESET:To clear away minutes, press the“R” button with your finger, a pencilor similar object.Then the clock willbe set precisely on the hour.For example, if the “R” button ispressed while the time is between9:01 and 9:29, the display will bereset to 9:00.9:01 ~ 9:29 ➾ 9:009:30 ~ 9:59 ➾ 10:00

Display conversionTo change the 12 hour format to the24 hour format, press the “R” buttonfor more than 4 seconds.For example, if the “R” button ispressed for more than 4 secondswhile the time is 10:15 p.m., the dis-play will be changed to 22:15.

1LDN2150

CAUTION• Use when the engine is run-

ning, and remove a plug fromthe power outlet after usingthe electric appliance. Usingelectrical accessories whenthe engine is not running mayresult in battery discharge.

• Only use 12V accessorieswhich are rated for less than10A maximum current draw.

• Adjust the air-conditioner orheater to the lowest operationlevel when you have to use thepower socket while using air-conditioner or heater.

• Close the cover when not inuse.

• Some electronic devices cancause electronic interferencewhen plugged into a vehicle'spower outlet. These devicesmay cause excessive audiostatic and malfunctions inother electronic systems ordevices used in your vehicle.


943

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

If your vehicle is equipped with thisfeature, you can slide or tilt your sun-roof with the sunroof control buttonslocated on the overhead console.(1) Slide button(2) Tilt button(3) Close buttonThe sunroof can only be opened,closed, or tilted when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

Sliding the sunroof Autoslide openTo use the autoslide feature,momentarily (less than 0.4 second)press the SLIDE OPEN ( ) buttonon the overhead console. The sun-roof will slide all the way open. Tostop the sunroof sliding at any point,press any sunroof control button.Manual slide openPress the SLIDE OPEN ( ) buttonon the overhead console for morethan 0.4 second.CloseTo close the sunroof, press theCLOSE ( ) button on the over-head console and hold it until thesunroof is closed.

SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

OLD026022

CAUTION• Do not continue to press the

sunroof control button(s) afterthe sunroof is in the fullyopen, closed, or tiltposition(s). Damage to themotor or system componentscould occur.

• The sunroof cannot slidewhen it is in the tilt positionnor can it be tilted while in anopen or slide position.

3 95

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Tilting the sunroof Autotilt openTo use the autotilt feature, momen-tarily (less than 0.4 second) pressthe TILT UP ( ) button on theoverhead console. The sunroof willtilt all the way open. To stop the sun-roof tilting at any point, press anysunroof control button.Manual tilt openPress the TILT UP ( ) button onthe overhead console for more than0.4 second.CloseTo close the sunroof, press theCLOSE ( ) button on the over-head console and hold it until thesunroof is closed.

Sunshade The sunshade will be opened withthe glass panel automatically whenthe glass panel is slid. You will haveto close it manually if you want itclosed.

E2BLA361

CAUTION• Do not press any sunroof con-

trol button longer than neces-sary. Damage to the motor orsystem components couldoccur.

• Periodically remove any dirtthat may accumulate on theguide rail.

• If you try to open the sunroofwhen the temperature isbelow freezing or when thesunroof is covered with snowor ice, the glass or the motorcould be damaged.

• The sunroof is made to slidetogether with sunshade. Donot leave the sunshade closedwhile the sunroof is open.

WARNING• Do not extend face or arms

outside through the sunroofopening while driving.

• Make sure hand and face aresafely out of the way beforeclosing a sunroof.


963

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

In case of an emergency If the sunroof does not open electri-cally:1. Open the sunglass holder.2. Remove the two (2) screws, and

then remove the overhead con-sole.

3. Insert the emergency handle (pro-vided with the vehicle) and turnthe handle clockwise to open orcounterclockwise to close.

Resetting the sunroofWhenever the vehicle battery is dis-connected or discharged, or you usethe emergency handle to operate thesunroof, you have to reset your sun-roof system as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to the ONposition.

2. According to the position of thesunroof, do as follows.1) in case that the sunroof has

closed completely or been tilt-ed : Press the TILT UP ( ) but-ton for 1 second.

2) in case that the sunroof hasslide-opened : Press and hold the CLOSE ( ) button for more than 5seconds until the sunroof hasclosed completely. And thenpress the TILT UP ( ) but-ton for 1 second.

3. Then, release it.4. Press and hold the TILT UP ( )

button once again until the sun-roof has returned to the originalposition of TILT UP ( ) after it israised a little higher than the max-imum TILT UP ( ) position.

When this is complete, the sunroofsystem is reset.

1LDN3201

3 97

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


To keep items from shifting in thetrunk, you can use the four ringslocated in the trunk to attach thecargo net.

LUGGAGE NET (IF EQUIPPED)

MMSA3066

WARNINGTo avoid eye injury. DO NOToverstretch the netting.ALWAYS keep face and bodyout of recoil path.DO NOT use the luggage netwhen strap has visible signs ofwear or damage.

CAUTIONDo not put fragile, bulky orexcessive quantity of items intoluggage net.They could be dam-aged.


983

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Fixed rod antenna (if equipped)Your car uses a fixed rod antenna toreceive both AM and FM broadcastsignals.This antenna is removable. Toremove the antenna, turn it counter-clockwise.To install the antenna, turnit clockwise.

Roof type antenna (if equipped)If your vehicle has an audio system,an amplifying antenna is installed inyour vehicle.This antenna is removable. To removethe antenna, turn it counterclockwise.To install the antenna, turn it clockwise.

Aux outletYou can use an aux outlet to connectan audio device.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen using a portable audio deviceconnected to the power outlet, noisemay occur during playback. If thishappens, use the power source of theportable audio device.

ANTENNA

1LDN3204 6LDN3001A

CAUTION• Be sure to remove the antenna

before washing the car in anautomatic car wash or it maybe damaged.

• When reinstalling your anten-na, it is important that it isfully tightened to ensure prop-er reception.

OLD026157

3 99

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


How car audio worksAM and FM radio signals are broad-cast from transmitter towers locatedaround your city. They are intercept-ed by the radio antenna on your car.This signal is then received by theradio and sent to your car speakers.When a strong radio signal hasreached your vehicle, the preciseengineering of your audio systemensures the best possible qualityreproduction.

However, in some cases the signalcoming to your vehicle may not bestrong and clear. This can be due tofactors such as the distance from theradio station, closeness of otherstrong radio stations or the presenceof buildings, bridges or other largeobstructions in the area.

AM broadcasts can be received atgreater distances than FM broad-casts. This is because AM radiowaves are transmitted at low fre-quencies. These long, low frequencyradio waves can follow the curvatureof the earth rather than travellingstraight out into the atmosphere. Inaddition, they curve around obstruc-tions so that they can provide bettersignal coverage.

AUDIO SYSTEM

¢ ¢ ¢

JBM001

¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢

JBM002

FM reception AM reception


1003

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

FM broadcasts are transmitted athigh frequencies and do not bend tofollow the earth's surface. Becauseof this, FM broadcasts generallybegin to fade at short distances fromthe station. Also, FM signals are eas-ily affected by buildings, mountains,or other obstructions. These canresult in certain listening conditionswhich might lead you to believe aproblem exists with your radio. Thefollowing conditions are normal anddo not indicate radio trouble:

• Fading - As your car moves awayfrom the radio station, the signalwill weaken and sound will begin tofade. When this occurs, we sug-gest that you select anotherstronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals orlarge obstructions between thetransmitter and your radio can dis-turb the signal causing static orfluttering noises to occur. Reducingthe treble level may lessen thiseffect until the disturbance clears.

• Station Swapping - As a FM signalweakens, another more powerfulsignal near the same frequencymay begin to play. This is becauseyour radio is designed to lock ontothe clearest signal. If this occurs,select another station with astronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radiosignals being received from sever-al directions can cause distortionor fluttering. This can be caused bya direct and reflected signal fromthe same station, or by signalsfrom two stations with close fre-quencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the conditionhas passed.

JBM003

FM radio station

¢ ¢ ¢

JBM004 JBM005

3 101


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Using a cellular phone or atwo-way radio When a cellular phone is used insidethe vehicle, noise may be producedfrom the audio equipment. This doesnot mean that something is wrongwith the audio equipment. In such acase, use the cellular phone at aplace as far as possible from theaudio equipment.

Care of cassette tapes (if equipped)• Because the thickness of a

sette tape with the total playbacktime of over 60 minutes (C-60) aretoo thin, we suggest that you donot use any of them to avoid hav-ing tapes being tangled.

• To achieve better sound quperiodically clean the tape headusing a cotton stick with colorlessalcohol (once per month).

• If a tape is too loose, fastenreel by winding with objects like apencil.

• Because dust or foreign objeca cassette tape may damage theplayback head, always store tapesin their cases when not in use.

• Make sure cassette tapes areaway from magnetic devices (TV,stereo system, etc) in order toachieve better sound quality.

• Be certain that no objects or stances other than cassette tapesare inserted into the cassette tapeplayer.

• Because tape media can betorted when exposed to direct sun-light, Do not leave cassette tapeson the seats, dashboard or nearthe back windshield.

WARNING - Cellularphones

Don’t use a cellular phone whenyou are driving. The driver muststop at a safe place to use a cel-lular phone.


1023

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Care of disc (if equipped)• If the temperature inside the car is

too high, open the car windows forventilation before using your caraudio.

• It is illegal to copy and useMP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE files with-out permission (If equipped withM465, use only MP3/WMA, ifequipped with M445, use only CD-DA). Use CDs that are created onlyby lawful means.

• Do not apply volatile agents suchas benzene and thinner, normalcleaners and magnetic spraysmade for analogue disc onto CDs.

• To prevent the disc surface fromgetting damaged. Hold and carryCDs by the edges or the edges ofthe center hole only.

• Clean the disc surface with a pieceof soft cloth before playback (wipeit from the center to the outsideedge).

• Do not damage the disc surface orattach pieces of sticky tape orpaper onto it.

• Make sure on undesirable matterother than CDs are inserted intothe CD player (Do not insert morethan one CD at a time).

• Keep CDs in their cases after useto protect them from scratches ordirt.

• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs maynot operate normally according tomanufacturing companies or mak-ing and recording methods. In suchcircumstances, if you still continueto use those CDs, they may causethe malfunction of your car audiosystem.

✽✽ NOTICE - Playing anIncompatible Copy-ProtectedAudio CD

Some copy-protected CDs, which donot comply with the internationalaudio CD standards (Red Book),may not play on your car audio.Please note that if you try to playcopy protected CDs and the CDplayer of your car audio is not per-forming to your expectation, thismay be caused by those CDs and nota defect in the device itself. Pleasereplace those CDs.

3 103


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob

2. BAND (AM/FM) Select Buttons

3. TUNE Select/AUDIO Control Knob

4. AUTO SEEK Select Button

5. SCAN Button

6. EQ Button

7. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

LD 445 NA

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M445) (IF EQUIPPED)


1043

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1. POWER ON-OFF ControlKnob

• The radio unit may be operatedwhen the ignition key is in the“ACC”or “ON” position. Press theknob to switch the power on. TheLCD shows the radio frequency inradio mode, and displays the CDtrack in CD mode. To switch thepower off, press the knob again.

• Push the FM/AM or CD to turn onthat function without pushing thePower ON-OFF control knob.

VOLUME ControlRotate the knob clockwise toincrease the volume and turn theknob counterclockwise to reduce thevolume.

2. BAND SelectorFM Selection Button Pressing the button changesthe FM1 and FM2 bands.

AM Select Button Pressing the button selectsthe AM band. AM mode is displayedon the LCD.

3. TUNE Select/AUDIO ControlKnob

Rotate the knob clockwise toincrease the frequency and turn theknob counterclockwise to reduce thefrequency.

Audio ControlPressing the Audio Control knobchanges the BASS, MID-RANGE,TREBLE, FADER and BALANCEmode.The mode selected is shown on thedisplay.After selecting each mode, rotate theAudio control knob clockwise orcounterclockwise.

BASS ControlTo increase the BASS, rotate theknob clockwise, while to decreasethe BASS, rotate the knob counter-clockwise.

MID-RANGE ControlTo increase the MID-RANGE, rotatethe knob clockwise, while todecrease the MID-RANGE, rotatethe knob counterclockwise.

TREBLE ControlTo increase the TREBLE, rotate theknob clockwise, while to decreasethe TREBLE, rotate the knob coun-terclockwise.

FADER ControlRotate the control knob clockwise toemphasize rear speaker sound (frontspeaker sound will be attenuated).When the control knob is turnedcounterclockwise, front speakersound will be emphasized (rearspeaker sound will be attenuated).

BALANCE ControlRotate the knob clockwise to empha-size right speaker sound (left speak-er sound will be attenuated). Whenthe control knob is turned counter-clockwise, left speaker sound will beemphasized (right speaker soundwill be attenuated).

AM

FM

3 105


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

4. AUTO SEEK Select Button(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the AUTO SEEK select button.When the side is pressed, the unitwill automatically tune to the nexthigher frequency and when the side is pressed, it will automaticallytune to the next lower frequency.

5. SCAN ButtonWhen you Press the button, frequen-cy is changed and the next channelis received automatically.To stay on a station, press the SCANbutton again.

6. EQ ButtonPress the EQ button to select theCLASSIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ andOFF MODE for the desired tonequality. Each press of the buttonchanges the display as follows;

7. PRESET STATION SelectButtons

Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2respectively can be preset in theelectronic memory circuit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONSSix AM and twelve FM stations maybe programmed into the memory ofthe radio. Then, by simply pressingthe AM/FM band select buttonsand/or one of the six station selectbuttons, you may recall any of thesestations instantly.To program the stations, follow thesesteps:

• Press AM/FM selector to set theband for AM, FM1 and FM2.

• Select the desired station to bestored by seek or manual tuning.

• Determine the preset station selectbutton you wish to use to accessthat station.

• Press and hold the station selectbutton for more than 0.8 seconds.A select button indicator will showin the display indicating whichselect button you have depressed.The frequency display will flashafter it has been stored into thememory. You should then releasethe button, and proceed to pro-gram the next desired station. Atotal of 18 stations can be pro-grammed by selecting one AM andtwo FM stations per button.

• When completed, any preset sta-tion may be recalled by selectingAM, FM1 or FM2 band and theappropriate station button.

CAUTION• Do not place beverages close

to the audio system.The audiosystem mechanism may bedamaged if you spill them.

• Do not strike or allow anythingto impact the audio system,damage to the system mecha-nisms could occur.

CLASSIC➟POPS➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟OFF


1063

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1. CD/AUX Select Button

2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button

3. FF/REW Button

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button

5. CD SCAN Button

6. CD EJECT Button

7. RANDOM (RDM) Button

LD 445 NA

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (M445) (IF EQUIPPED)

3 107


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1. CD/AUX Select ButtonCD Select• Insert the CD with the label facing

upward.• Insert the CD to start CD playback,

during radio operation.• When a disc is in the CD deck, if

you press the CD/AUX button theCD player will begin playing even ifthe radio player is being used.

• The CD/AUX player can be usedwhen the ignition switch is in eitherthe “ON” or “ACC” position.

• Push the CD/AUX button to turn onthat function without pushing thePower ON-OFF control knob.

✽✽ NOTICE• Do not stick paper or tape etc., on

the label side or the recording sideof any discs, as it may cause a mal-function.

• The unit cannot play a CD-R(Recordable CD) and CD-RW(Rewritable CD) that is notfinalized.

(Continued)

(Continued)Please refer to the manual of CD-R/CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CD-RW software for more informa-tion on finalization process.

• Depending on the recording sta-tus, some CD-Rs/CD-RWs maynot be played on this unit.

AUX-IN Select• When the AUX device (such as

portable MP3 players) is connect-ed to vehicle's AUX-IN terminal,you can switch to AUX-IN mode bypressing CD/AUX button.

• With a CD loaded and AUX deviceconnected at the same time, thisbutton switches between AUX-INmode and CD mode.

✽✽ NOTICE• If the AUX device is not connect-

ed, you cannot switch to AUX-INmode.

• When the AUX device is discon-nected while in AUX-IN mode, theunit automatically switches itsmode to last selected mode (CDmode or RADIO mode).

• The quality of sound may bedefected or distorted when theunit's EQ (BASS/MID/TREBLE)control and AUX device's EQ con-trol are both enabled (not flat).When you want to use the unit'sEQ control feature, disable theAUX device's EQ control feature,and vice versa.

• When using a portable audiodevice connected to the power out-let, noise may occur during play-back. If this happens, use thepower source of the portable audiodevice.

AUX 3.5mm STEREO MINI PLUG


1083

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button• The desired track on the disc cur-

rently being played can be select-ed using the track number.

• Press button once to skip for-ward to the beginning of the nexttrack.Press within a second afterplayback begins to quickly movebackward through a CD.If you press after more than asecond, it will take you to thebeginning of the track you are nowlistening to.

3. FF/REW Button If you want to fast forward or reversethrough the compact disc track, pushand hold the FF or REW button.When you release the button, thecompact disc player will resumeplaying.

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button• To repeat the track you are current-

ly listening to, press the RPT but-ton. To cancel, press it again.

• If you do not release RPT opera-tion when the track ends, it willautomatically be replayed.This process will be continued untilyou push the button again or turnthe Power OFF then ON.

5. CD SCAN Button• To playback the first 10 seconds of

each track, press the CD SCANbutton.

• Press the CD SCAN button againwithin 10 sec. when you havereached the desired track.

6. CD EJECT ButtonWhen the button is pressed with aCD loaded, the CD will eject.Forcing to eject : To force to eject aCD, press this button for more than 3seconds.(Do this only when a CD is jammedand you can not eject it in the normalway - e.g.) in case that you haveinserted 2 CDs by mistake)

7. RANDOM (RDM) ButtonWith random, you can listen to thetracks in random, rather thansequential order.To use random, do the following:Press the RDM button to listen torecorded tracks in randomsequence. Press RDM again to can-cel or turn the power OFF then ON.The unit defaults to playing tracks insequential order.

3 109


✽✽ NOTICE• To assure proper operation of the

unit, keep the vehicle interior tem-perature within a normal range byusing the vehicle's air conditioningor heating system.

• When replacing the fuse, replace itwith a fuse having the correctcapacity.

• All stored bookmarks are allerased when the car battery is dis-connected or power to the vehicleis lost. If this occurs, the book-marks will have to be reset.

• This equipment is designed to beused only in a 12 volt DC batterysystem with negative ground.

• This unit is made of precisionparts. Do not attempt to disassem-ble or adjust any parts.

• Do not expose this equipment(including the speakers and CD)to water or excessive moisture.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CAUTION• Do not insert warped or poor

quality discs into the CD play-er as damage to the unit mayoccur.

• Do not insert anything likecoins into the player slot asdamage to the unit may occur.

• Do not place beverages closeto the audio system. The play-back mechanism may be dam-aged if you spill them.


• Off-road or rough surfacedriving may cause the com-pact disc to skip. Do not usethe compact disc when driv-ing in such conditions asdamage to the compact discface could occur.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not attempt to grab or pull

the compact disc out while thedisc is being pulled into theaudio unit by the self-loadingmechanism. Damage to theaudio unit and compact disccould occur.

• Avoid using recorded com-pact discs in your audio unit.Original compact discs arerecommended for bestresults.

WARNING When driving your vehicle, besure to keep the volume of theunit set low enough to allow youto hear sounds coming from theoutside.


1103

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob

2. AUDIO Select Button

3. BAND Select Button

4. SCAN Button

5. EQ Button

6. AUTO SEEK Select Button

7. TUNE Select/AUDIO Control knob

8. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

LD 445MP3 NA

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M445MP3) (IF EQUIPPED)

3 111


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1. POWER ON-OFF ControlKnob

• The radio unit may be operatedwhen the ignition key is in the "ACC"or "ON" position. Press the button toswitch the power on. The LCDshows the radio frequency in theradio mode or CD/MP3 track in theCD/MP3 mode. To switch the poweroff, press the button again.

• Push the FM/AM, TAPE or CD/MP3to turn on that function without push-ing the Power ON-OFF control knob.

VOLUME Control Rotate the knob clockwise to increasethe volume and turn the knob coun-terclockwise to reduce the volume.

2. AUDIO Select ButtonPressing the AUDIO button changesthe BASS, MID-RANGE, TREBLE,FADER and BALANCE mode.The mode selected is shown on thedisplay.

After selecting each mode, rotate theAudio control knob clockwise orcounterclockwise.BASS ControlTo increase the BASS, rotate theknob clockwise, while to decreasethe BASS, rotate the knob counter-clockwise.

MID-RANGE ControlTo increase the MID-RANGE, rotatethe knob clockwise, while to decreasethe MID-RANGE, rotate the knobcounterclockwise.

TREBLE ControlTo increase the TREBLE, rotate theknob clockwise, while to decreasethe TREBLE, rotate the knob coun-terclockwise.

FADER ControlTurn the control knob clockwise toemphasize rear speaker sound (frontspeaker sound will be attenuated).When the control knob is turnedcounterclockwise, front speakersound will be emphasized (rearspeaker sound will be attenuated).

BALANCE ControlRotate the knob clockwise to empha-size right speaker sound (left speak-er sound will be attenuated).When the control knob is turnedcounterclockwise, left speaker soundwill be emphasized (right speakersound will be attenuated).

3. BAND Select ButtonPressing the FM/AM button changesthe AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. Themode selected is shown on the dis-play.

4. SCAN ButtonWhen you press the button, frequen-cy is changed and the next channelis received automatically.To stay on a station, press the SCANbutton again.



1123

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

6. AUTO SEEK Select Button(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the AUTO SEEK select button.When the side is pressed, theunit will automatically tune to thenext higher frequency and when the

side is pressed, it will automati-cally tune to the next lower frequen-cy.

7.TUNE Select/Audio ControlKnob

Rotate the knob clockwise toincrease the frequency and turn theknob counterclockwise to reduce thefrequency.

8. PRESET STATION SelectButtons

Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2respectively can be preset in theelectronic memory circuit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONSSix AM and twelve FM stations maybe programmed into the memory ofthe radio. Then, by simply pressingthe AM/FM band select button and/orone of the six station select buttons,you may recall any of these stationsinstantly. To program the stations, fol-low these steps:

• Press AM/FM selector to set theband for AM, FM1 and FM2.

• Select the desired station to bestored by seek or manual tuning.

• Determine the preset station selectbutton you wish to use to accessthat station.

• Press and hold the station selectbutton for more than 0.8 seconds. Aselect button indicator will show inthe display indicating which selectbutton you have depressed.The fre-quency display will flash after it hasbeen stored in to the memory. Youshould then release the button, andproceed to program the nextdesired station. A total of 18 stationscan be programmed by selectingone AM and two FM stations perbutton.

• When completed, any preset sta-tion may be recalled by selectingAM, FM1 or FM2 band and theappropriate station button.

CAUTION• Do not place beverages close

to the audio system. The play-back mechanism may be dam-aged if you spill them.



3 113


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD or AUX Select Button

2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button

3. FF/REW Button

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button

5. RANDOM (RDM) Button

6. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button

7. SCROLL Button

8. EQ Button

9. CD EJECT Button

10. CD SCAN Button

11. FILE SEARCH Knob

(TUNE Select Knob)

12. DIRECTORY SEARCH (DIR) Button

LD 445MP3 NA

COMPACT DISC PLAYER (M455MP3) (IF EQUIPPED) - COMPATIBLE WITH MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE


1143

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD or AUXSelect Button

AUDIO/MP3 CD Select• Insert the CD with the label facing

upward.• Insert the CD to start CD playback,

during radio operation.• If you press the CD/AUX button

while a disc is in the CD deck, theCD player will begin playing even ifthe radio or cassette player isbeing used.

• The CD/AUX player can be usedwhen the ignition switch is in eitherthe “ON” or “ACC” position.

• Push the CD/AUX button to turn onthat function without pushing thePower ON-OFF control knob.

✽✽ NOTICE• Do not stick paper or tape etc., on the

label side or the recording side of anydiscs, as it may cause a malfunction.

• The unit can play a multi-sessionCD-R (recordable CD) and CD-RW (rewritable CD) that consistsof more than two sessions.

(Continued)

(Continued)Please refer to the manual of CD-R/CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CD-RW software for more informa-tion on finalization process.

• Depending on the recording sta-tus, some CD-Rs/CD-RWs maynot be played on this unit.

✽✽ NOTICEPlayback of MP3, AAC and WMAfile formats are supported. Load toplay time for these formats may belonger due to the compressed natureof these discs.




✽✽ NOTICE• If the AUX device is not connected,

you cannot switch to AUX-INmode.


• The quality of sound may be defect-ed or distorted when the unit's EQ(BASS/MID/TREBLE) control andAUX device's EQ control are bothenabled (not flat). When you wantto use the unit's EQ control feature,disable the AUX device's EQ con-trol feature, and vice versa.

• When using a portable audio deviceconnected to the power outlet, noisemay occur during playback. If thishappens, use the power source ofthe portable audio device.


3 115


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button• The desired track on the disc cur-

rently being played can be select-ed using the track number.

• Press button once to skip for-ward to the beginning of the nexttrack.Press within a second afterplayback begins to quickly movebackward through a CD.If you press after more than asecond, it will take you to thebeginning of the file you are nowlistening to.

3. FF/REW Button If you want to fast forward or reversethrough the compact disc track, pushand hold the FF or REW button.When you release the button, the com-pact disc player will resume playing.

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button• To repeat the track you are current-

ly listening to, press the RPT but-ton. To cancel, press it again.

• To repeat the music within selectedfolder, press the RPT button formore than 0.8 seconds. To cancel,press it again. (MP3 CD only)

• If you do not release RPT opera-tion when the track ends, it willautomatically be replayed.This process will be continued untilyou push the button again or turnthe power OFF then ON.

5. RANDOM (RDM) ButtonWith random, you can listen to thetracks in random, rather thansequential order.To use random, do the following:• Press the RDM button to listen to

recorded tracks in randomsequence. Press RDM again tocancel or turn the power OFF thenON. The unit defaults to playingtracks in sequential order.

• To listen to the music within theselected folder in random order,press the RDM button within a sec-ond. To cancel, press it again orturn the power OFF then ON. (MP3CD only)

6. BOOKMARK (MARK) ButtonWhen the CD player unit is operat-ing, the desired track on the disc canbe bookmarked by using the MARKbutton. (MP3 CD only)

• Press the MARK button for morethan 0.8 seconds to bookmark thedesired track.“M” will be displayed on the LCDand “MEMORY(1~50)” will displayfor approximately five seconds withbeep sound.To play a bookmarked track, pressthe MARK button within 0.8 sec-onds and select the bookmarkedtrack to play.

• To erase a bookmarked track,press the MARK button for morethan 0.8 seconds. The unit willbeep once when the bookmark iserased.

✽✽ NOTICETracks stored on Mark Memory willbe automatically erased after youeject CDs that contain those tracks.


1163

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

7. SCROLL ButtonPress the button, and you can checkthe file names with more than 16characters on MP3 CD (max 34characters.).The button doesn’t work on filenames less than 16 characters.


9. CD EJECT ButtonWhen the button is pressed with aCD loaded, the CD will eject.Forcing to eject : To force to eject aCD, press this button for more than 3seconds.(Do this only when a CD is jammedand you can not eject it in the normalway - e.g.) in case that you haveinserted 2 CDs by mistake)

10. CD SCAN Button• To playback the first 10 seconds of

each track, press the CD SCANbutton more than 0.8 seconds.

• To playback the first 10 seconds ofeach track in the selected folder,press the CD SCAN button within0.8 seconds. (MP3 CD only)

• Press the CD SCAN button againwithin 10 sec. when you havereached the desired track.

11. FILE SEARCH Knob (TUNE Select Knob)

• You can skip the track (file) by turn-ing the FILE SEARCH knob clock-wise or counterclockwise.After selecting the desired track(file), press the FILE SEARCHknob to playback the track (file).If you do not press the FILESEARCH knob within five seconds,the search will stop.

12. DIRECTORY SEARCH (DIR)Button

• You can move through the folder bypushing the DIR button to up ( )and down( ).

• After moving the desired folder,press the FILE SEARCH knob toplay back in the selected folder. Ifyou do not press the FILESEARCH knob within 5 seconds,the folder searching function will bereleased. It can not be operated ina single folder.


3 117


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

✽✽ NOTICE• To assure proper operation of the

unit, keep the vehicle interior tem-perature within a normal range byusing the vehicle's air conditioningor heating system.

• When replacing the fuse, replace itwith a fuse having the correctcapacity.

• All stored bookmarks are allerased when the car battery is dis-connected or power to the vehicleis lost. If this occurs, the book-marks will have to be reset.

• This equipment is designed to beused only in a 12 volt DC batterysystem with negative ground.

• This unit is made of precisionparts. Do not attempt to disassem-ble or adjust any parts.

• Do not expose this equipment(including the speakers and tape)to water or excessive moisture.

CAUTION• Do not insert warped or poor

quality discs into the CD play-er as damage to the unit mayoccur.

• Do not insert anything likecoins into the player slot asdamage to the unit may occur.

• Do not place beverages closeto the audio system. The play-back mechanism may be dam-aged if you spill them.


• Off-road or rough surfacedriving may cause the com-pact disc to skip. Do not usethe compact disc when driv-ing in such conditions asdamage to the compact discface could occur.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not attempt to grab or pull

the compact disc out while thedisc is being pulled into theaudio unit by the self-loadingmechanism. Damage to theaudio unit and compact disccould occur.

• Avoid using recorded com-pact discs in your audio unit.Original compact discs arerecommended for bestresults.

WARNING When driving your vehicle, besure to keep the volume of theunit set low enough to allow youto hear sounds coming from theoutside.


1183

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9LD 600 NA

1,2. Power on /off and volume control button

3. Radio selection button

4. Scan Button

5. Automatic station selection button (Seek)

6. Manual station selection button (Tune)

7. Pre-set button

8. LCD Display

9. Bass control/ left, right audio control

RADIO AND AUDIO QUALITY/VOLUME CONTROL, EQ (HMP600) (IF EQUIPPED)

1. Power on/off and volumecontrol button

When the ignition switch is on ACCor ON, push this button to power on.Push this button again to power off.

2. Volume control buttonRotate this button clockwise to vol-ume up and anti-clockwise to volumedown.

3. Radio selection button(FM/AM)

Push [FM/AM] button for FM or AMradio. Each press will changeFM1➟FM2➟AM➟FM1 and repeats.

4. Scan buttonPush this button to automaticallyselect available stations and remainsfor 5 seconds from current station.Push again to stay on current station.

BSM buttonPush [BSM] button to start automaticsearch from current station. The sta-tions are memorized in 1~6 pre-setbuttons from smallest station.Number 1 pre-set station will be onafter the search and memory.

5. Automatic station selectionbutton (Seek)

Push [seek ] button, to increasethe band and [seek ] button todecrease the band. It automaticallyfinds available station. If the station isalready memorized in pre-set memo-ry, it will show the pre-set number.

6. Manual station selectionbutton (Tune)

Rotate this tune button clockwise 1click to increase band 1 step andanti-clockwise to decrease.

Regular export• FM: Move by 0.1MHz

(87.5➟87.6➟87.7····87.7➟87.6➟87.5)

• AM: Move by 9 KHz (531➟540➟549····549➟540➟531)

North America export (Columbianunits FM move by 0.1 MHz)• FM: Move by 0.2MHz

(87.5➟87.7➟87.9····87.9➟87.7➟87.5)

• AM: Move by 10 KHz (530➟540➟550····550➟540➟530)

7. Pre-set button (1~6)Push these buttons to listen to mem-orized stations. Push pre-set buttonfor more than 1.5 seconds (with abeep) to memorize current station.

8. LCD displayIt indicates FM1/FM2/AM along withcurrent band, pre-set channel, FMstereo with "ST".

3 119


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


1203

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

9. Bass control/ left, rightaudio control

Push this button to select BASS➟

MIDDLE ➟ TREBBLE ➟ FADER ➟

BALANCE on LCD display screen.

Rotate the volume buttonclockwise to increasehigh sound and anti-clockwise to decreasehigh sound.

Rotate the volume buttonclockwise to enable rightspeakers and anti-clock-wise to enable left speak-ers.

Rotate the volume buttonclockwise to increaseback speaker sound andanti-clockwise to increa-se front speaker sound.

TREBLE

BALANCE

FADER

Rotate the volume buttonclockwise to increaseBass sound and anti-clockwise to decreaseBass sound.

Rotate the volume buttonclockwise to increasemiddle sound and anti-clockwise to decreaseMiddle sound.

BASS

MIDDLE

3 121


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1.CD loading slot

2.CD load button

3.CD eject button

4. LCD Display

5.CD/AUX selection button

6.CD change button

7,8.Fast Backward and Fast Forward button

9.Previous track automatic selection button

10. Next track automatic selection button

11.Repeat button

12.SCAN button

13.MARK button

14.RDM button

15.FILE search knob

16.SCROLL button

17.Directory search button

LD 600NA

MP3 CDC (HMP600) (IF EQUIPPED)


1223

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1. CD loading slotPush [LOAD] button to open CD slot.Please face printed side upward andgently push in. This CDC supportsonly 12 cm CDs.

2. CD load button Pressing the "LOAD" button opensan empty tray of lowest order in theCDC deck. When a CD is loaded, theslot closes and the CD plays. To loadCDs in all empty slots, press the"LOAD" button for more than 1.5 sec-onds. Be sure to insert only one CDinto slot at a time. Then, lastly loadedCD is played. If you do not load CDsor press any button for 10 secondsafter pressing the "LOAD" button, theLOAD function will be canceled.

3. CD eject buttonPush button to eject the CD dur-ing CD playback. Push this button formore than 1.5 seconds to eject allthe CDs. If CD number 3 is currentlyplaying, ejecting order is 3,4,5,6,1,2.

4. LCD display It indicates location of CD in CDdeck. When loading and ejecting CD,corresponding CD indicator numberblinks.

5. CD/AUX selection buttonCD SelectWhen power is off while CD is loadedor radio/AUX is playing, push [CD]button to play CDC. When there is noavailable CD, "no disc" message willbe indicated for 2 seconds andreturns to previous mode.





✽✽ NOTICE• If the AUX device is not connect-

ed, you cannot switch to AUX-INmode.


• The quality of sound may bedefected or distorted when theunit's EQ (BASS/MID/TREBLE)control and AUX device's EQ con-trol are both enabled (not flat).When you want to use the unit'sEQ control feature, disable theAUX device's EQ control feature,and vice versa.

6. CD change buttonPush [DISC ] button to change tonext CD (From CD 1 to CD 2).Push [DISC ] button to change toprevious CD (From CD 2 to CD 1). Ifchanger is not fully load, thechanges will be next available CD.

7. Fast Backward buttonDuring CD playback, push [REW]button to fast backward. For first 5seconds 5X and 15X after 5 sec-onds. While the button is pressedsound is reduced to 12dB.

8. Fast Forward buttonDuring CD playback, push [FF] but-ton to fast forward. For first 5 sec-onds 5X and 15X after 5 seconds.While the button is pressed sound isreduced to 12dB.

9. Previous track automaticselection button

Push [TRACK ] button to go tobeginning of currently playing track.Push again to move to beginning ofprevious track.

10. Next track automatic selec-tion button

Push [SEEK ] button to go to moveto beginning of next track.

11. Repeat button Push [RPT] button to repeat currenttrack. Push again to disable.

12. SCAN buttonPush [SCAN] button to listen eachtrack for 10 seconds. Push again todisable.

13. Book Mark buttonThis is selecting desired tracks.Select desired tracks and push[MARK] button for more than 2 sec-onds. [M] symbol will be indicatedand push for within 1 second to play[M] selected tracks.

14. RDM buttonThis button randomly selects track.

✽✽ NOTICEUsing CD-R/CD-RW, it may not beplayed according to CD manufac-turer, or how it was created. If itdoes not play, please avoid using it.It could cause problems on the sys-tem.

15. File search knobTurn knob left and right to changetrack. Push within 5 seconds to playselected track. It will return to cur-rently playing track number after 5seconds.

16. Scroll button If the tile is too long for MP3/WMAfiles, push [SCROLL] button to indi-cate on LCD display screen.

17. Directory search buttonFor MP3/WMA files, if there are morethan 2 directories in a CD, push[Directory Search] buttons to search.Select desired directory and use"File Search knob" to search file.Push "File Search knob" within 5seconds otherwise it will go back tocurrent playing track.

3 123


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Ignition switch / 4-2Starting the engine / 4-4Manual transaxle / 4-5Automatic transaxle / 4-6Brake system / 4-11Steering wheel / 4-18Cruise control / 4-21

Traction control system / 4-25Instrument cluster / 4-28Gauges / 4-29Warnings and indicators / 4-31Lighting / 4-39Wipers and washers / 4-43Defroster / 4-45Hazard warning flasher / 4-46Manual climate control system / 4-47Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-56Theft-alarm system / 4-58



24

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Illuminated ignition switchWhenever a door is opened, the igni-tion switch will be illuminated for yourconvenience, provided the ignitionswitch is not in the ON position. Thelight will go off approximately 30 sec-onds after closing the door or whenthe ignition switch is turned on.

Ignition switch and anti-theftsteering column lock Ignition switch positionLOCKThe steering wheel locks to protectagainst theft. The ignition key can beremoved only in the LOCK position.When turning the ignition switch tothe LOCK position, push the keyinward at the ACC position and turnthe key toward the LOCK position.

ACC (Accessory)The steering wheel is unlocked andelectrical accessories are operative.

ONThe warning lights can be checkedbefore the engine is started. This isthe normal running position after theengine is started.Do not leave the ignition switch ON ifthe engine is not running to preventbattery discharge.

STARTTurn the ignition key to the STARTposition to start the engine. Theengine will crank until you releasethe key; then it returns to the ONposition. The brake warning lampcan be checked in this position.

✽✽ NOTICEIf difficulty is experienced in turn-ing the ignition key to the STARTposition, turn the steering wheelright and left to release resistanceand then turn the key.

IGNITION SWITCH

1LDA3012 OUN036002

4 3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


WARNING - Ignition key• Never turn the ignition switch

to LOCK or ACC while thevehicle is moving. This wouldresult in loss of directionalcontrol and braking function,which could cause an immedi-ate accident.

• The anti-theft steering columnlock is not a substitute for theparking brake. Before leavingthe driver’s seat, always makesure the shift lever is engagedin 1st gear for manualtransaxle or P (Park) for auto-matic transaxle, set the park-ing brake fully and shut theengine off. Unexpected andsudden vehicle movementmay occur if these precau-tions are not taken.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Never reach for the ignition

switch, or any other controlsthrough the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is in motion.The presence of your hand orarm in this area could cause aloss of vehicle control, anaccident and serious bodilyinjury or death.

• Do not place any movableobjects around the driver’sseat as they may move whiledriving, interfere with the driv-er and lead to an accident.


44

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1. Make sure the parking brake isapplied.

2. Manual Transaxle - Depress theclutch pedal fully and shift thetransaxle into Neutral. Keep theclutch pedal depressed while turn-ing the ignition switch to the startposition. The starter will not oper-ate if the clutch pedal is not fullydepressed.Automatic Transaxle - Place thetransaxle shift lever in P (Park).Depress the brake pedal fully.You can also start the enginewhen the shift lever is in the N(Neutral) position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to STARTand hold it there until the enginestarts (a maximum of 10 seconds),then release the key.

4. In extremely cold weather (below -18°C / 0°F) or after the vehiclehas not been operated for severaldays, let the engine warm up with-out depressing the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm,it should be started withoutdepressing the accelerator.

The starter will not operate if:• Manual Transaxle - the clutch

pedal is not fully depressed.• Automatic Transaxle - the shift

lever is NOT in the P (Park) or N(Neutral) position.

STARTING THE ENGINE

CAUTIONIf the engine stalls while you arein motion, do not attempt tomove the shift lever to the P(Park) position. If traffic androad conditions permit, you mayput the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position while thevehicle is still moving and turnthe ignition switch to the STARTposition in an attempt to restartthe engine.

WARNING Always wear appropriate shoeswhen operating your vehicle.Unsuitable shoes (high heels,ski boots,etc.) may interferewith your ability to use thebrake and accelerator pedal,and the clutch (if equipped).

CAUTIONDo not engage the starter formore than 10 seconds. If theengine stalls or fails to start,wait 5 to 10 seconds before re-engaging the starter. Improperuse of the starter may damageit.

4 5

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Manual transaxle operationThe manual transaxle has five for-ward gears.Press the clutch pedal down fullywhile shifting, then release it slowly.A special safety feature preventsinadvertent shifting from 5 (Fifth) toR (Reverse).The gearshift lever mustbe returned to the neutral positionbefore shifting into R (Reverse).Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped before shifting into R(Reverse).Never operate the engine with thetachometer (rpm) in the red zone.

DownshiftingWhen you must slow down in heavytraffic or while driving up steep hills,downshift before the engine starts to“labor’’. Downshifting reduces thechance of stalling and gives betteracceleration when you again need toincrease your speed. When the vehi-cle is traveling down steep hills,downshifting helps maintain safespeed and prolongs brake life.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

OLD046003N WARNING - Manualtransaxle

Before leaving the driver’s seat,always set the parking brakefully and shut the engine off.Then make sure the transaxle isshifted into 1st gear on level oruphill ground or into R(Reverse) gear on downhillground. Unexpected and sud-den vehicle movement canoccur if these precautions arenot followed in the order identi-fied.

CAUTIONTo avoid premature clutch wearand damage, do not drive withyour foot resting on the clutchpedal. Also, don’t use the clutchto hold the vehicle stopped onan upgrade, while waiting for atraffic light, etc.


64

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

OLD036019N

The lock release button must be depressed while moving the shift lever.

Depress the brake pedal and push the button when shifting.

The shift lever can be moved without depressing the lock release button.

Lock release button Prevents shift lever movementwithout first depressing the button.

4 7

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Automatic transaxle operationAll normal forward driving is donewith the shift lever in the D (Drive)position.To move the shift lever from the P(Park) position, the brake pedal mustbe depressed and the lock releasebutton must be depressed.

For smooth operation, depress thebrake pedal when shifting from N(Neutral) to a forward or reversegear.

WARNING - Automatictransaxle

Before leaving the driver’s seat,always make sure the shift leveris in the P (PARK) position; thenset the parking brake fully andshut the engine off. Unexpectedand sudden vehicle movementcan occur if these precautionsare not followed in the orderidentified.

CAUTION• To avoid damage to your

transaxle, do not acceleratethe engine in R (Reverse) orany forward gear position withthe brakes on.

• When stopped on an upgrade,do not hold the vehicle sta-tionary with engine power.Use the service brake or theparking brake.

• Do not shift from N (Neutral)or P (Park) into D (Drive), or R(Reverse) when the engine isabove idle speed.


84

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Transaxle rangesP (park)This position locks the transaxle andprevents the front wheels from rotat-ing. Always come to a complete stopbefore shifting into this position.

R (reverse)Use this position to drive the vehiclebackward.

(Continued)• Before leaving the driver’s

seat, always make sure theshift lever is in the P (PARK)position. Set the parkingbrake fully, shut the engine offand take the key with you.Unexpected and sudden vehi-cle movement can occur if youdo not follow these precau-tions in the order specified.

WARNING• Shifting into P (Park) while the

vehicle is in motion will causethe drive wheels to lock whichwill cause you to lose controlof the vehicle.

• Do not use the P (Park) posi-tion in place of the parkingbrake. Always make sure theshift lever is latched in the P(Park) position so that it can-not be moved unless the lockrelease button is pushed in,AND set the parking brakefully.

(Continued)

CAUTIONAlways come to a complete stopbefore shifting into or out of R(Reverse); you may damage thetransaxle if you shift into Rwhile the vehicle is in motion,except as explained in “Rockingthe Vehicle”, in this manual.

CAUTIONThe transaxle may be damagedif you shift into P (Park) whilethe vehicle is in motion.

4 9

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


N (neutral)With the gearshift in the N position,the wheels and transaxle are notlocked. The vehicle will roll freelyeven on the slightest incline unlessthe parking brake or service brakesare applied.

D (drive)This is the normal forward drivingposition. The transaxle will automati-cally shift through a 4-gearsequence, providing the best fueleconomy and power.

For extra power when passing anoth-er vehicle or climbing grades,depress the accelerator fully, atwhich time the transaxle will auto-matically downshift to the next lowergear.

3 (Third Gear)Move shift lever to this position fortowing a trailer during hill climbing.This position also provides enginebraking when going down hills.

2 (Second Gear)Use 2 (Second Gear) for more powerwhen climbing hills and for increasedbraking when going down hills. Thisposition also helps reduce wheelspin on slippery surfaces. When theshift lever is placed in 2 (SecondGear), the transaxle will automatical-ly shift from first to second gear.

L (Low)Move the shift lever to this position inhard pulling situations and for climb-ing steep grades.

CAUTIONDo not exceed the recommend-ed maximum speeds in 2(Second Gear) or L (Low).Operating the vehicle at speedsabove the maximum recom-mended, for 2 (Second Gear) orL (Low) may cause excessiveheat to develop which couldresult in damage to or failure ofthe automatic transaxle.


104

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Moving up a steep grade froma standing startTo move up a steep grade from astanding start, depress the brakepedal, shift the shift lever to D(Drive). Select the appropriate geardepending on load weight and steep-ness of the grade, and release theparking brake. Depress the accelera-tor gradually while releasing theservice brakes.

Shift lock systemFor your safety, the AutomaticTransaxle has a shift lock systemwhich prevents shifting the transaxleout of P (Park) unless the brakepedal is depressed.To shift the transaxle out of P (Park):1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.2. Start the engine or turn the ignition

to the ON position.3. Depress the lock release button

and move the shift lever.When the ignition switch is in theLOCK position, the transaxle cannotbe shifted from P (Park).

Ignition key interlock systemThe ignition key cannot be removedunless the shift lever is in the P(Park) position. If the ignition switchis in any other position, the key can-not be removed.

WARNING Always fully depress the brakepedal before and while shiftingout of the P (Park) position intoanother position to avoid inad-vertent motion of the vehiclewhich could injure persons in oraround the car.

4 11

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Power brakes Your vehicle has power-assistedbrakes that adjust automaticallythrough normal usage.In the event that the power-assistedbrakes lose power because of astalled engine or some other reason,you can still stop your vehicle byapplying greater force to the brakepedal than you normally would. Thestopping distance, however, will belonger.When the engine is not running, thereserve brake power is partiallydepleted each time the brake pedalis applied. Do not pump the brakepedal when the power assist hasbeen interrupted.Pump the brake pedal only whennecessary to maintain steering con-trol on slippery surfaces.

In the event of brake failure If service brakes fail to operate whilethe vehicle is in motion, you canmake an emergency stop with theparking brake. The stopping dis-tance, however, will be much greaterthan normal.

BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING - Parking brakeApplying the parking brakewhile the vehicle is moving atnormal speeds can cause a sud-den loss of control of the vehi-cle. If you must use the parkingbrake to stop the vehicle, usegreat caution in applying thebrake.

WARNING - Brakes• Do not drive with your foot

resting on the brake pedal.This will create abnormal highbrake temperatures, exces-sive brake lining and padwear, and increased stoppingdistances.

• When descending a long orsteep hill, shift to a lower gearand avoid continuous applica-tion of the brakes. Continuousbrake application will causethe brakes to overheat andcould result in a temporaryloss of braking performance.

(Continued)


124

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Disc brakes wear indicator Your vehicle has disc brakes.When your brake pads are worn andit's time for new pads, you will hear ahigh-pitched warning sound fromyour front brakes or rear brakes (ifequipped). You may hear this soundcome and go or it may occur when-ever you depress the brake pedal.Please remember that some drivingconditions or climates may cause abrake squeal when you first apply (orlightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-mal and does not indicate a problemwith your brakes.

WARNING - Brake wearThis brake wear warning soundmeans your vehicle needs serv-ice. If you ignore this audiblewarning, you will eventually losebraking performance, whichcould lead to a serious accident.

CAUTIONAlways replace brake pads ascomplete front or rear axle sets.

(Continued)• Wet brakes may result in the

vehicle not slowing down atthe usual rate and pulling toone side when the brakes areapplied. Applying the brakeslightly will indicate whetherthey have been affected in thisway. Always test your brakesin this fashion after drivingthrough deep water. To dry thebrakes, apply them lightlywhile maintaining a safe for-ward speed until brake per-formance returns to normal.

CAUTIONTo avoid costly brake repairs, donot continue to drive with wornbrake pads.

4 13

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Parking brake To engage the parking brake, firstapply the foot brake and then withoutpressing the release button in, pullthe parking brake lever up as far aspossible. In addition it is recommend-ed that when parking the vehicle ona gradient, the shift lever should bepositioned in the appropriate lowgear on manual transaxle vehicles orin the P (Park) position on automatictransaxle vehicles.

To release the parking brake, firstapply the foot brake and pull up theparking brake lever slightly.Secondly, depress the release buttonand lower the parking brake leverwhile holding the button.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you depress the release buttonwithout pulling up the parkingbrake lever, you will not be able torelease the parking brake.

WARNING - Parking brake• To prevent unintentional

movement when stopped andleaving the vehicle, do not usethe gearshift lever in place ofthe parking brake. Set theparking brake AND make surethe gearshift lever is securelypositioned in 1st (First) gearor R (Reverse) for manualtransaxle equipped vehiclesand in P (Park) for automatictransaxle equipped vehicles.

• Never allow a person who isunfamiliar with the vehicle orchildren to touch the parkingbrake. If the parking brake isreleased unintentionally, seri-ous injury may occur.

OLD036031OLD036030

CAUTIONDriving with the parking brakeapplied will cause excessivebrake pad and brake rotor wear.


144

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Check the brake warning light byturning the ignition switch ON (do notstart the engine). This light will beilluminated when the parking brake isapplied with the ignition switch in theSTART or ON position.Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off.

If the brake warning light remains onafter the parking brake is released,there may be a malfunction in thebrake system. Immediate attention isnecessary.If at all possible, cease driving thevehicle immediately. If that is not pos-sible, use extreme caution whileoperating the vehicle and only con-tinue to drive the vehicle until youcan reach a safe location or repairshop.

Parking on curbed streets • When parking your vehicle on an

uphill grade, park as close to thecurb as possible and turn the frontwheels away from the curb so thatthe front wheels will contact thecurb if the vehicle moves back-ward.

• When parking your vehicle on adownhill grade, park as close to thecurb as possible and turn the frontwheels toward the curb so that thefront wheels will contact the curb ifthe vehicle moves forward.

W-75

4 15

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Anti-lock brake system (ABS)(if equipped)

The ABS system continuously sens-es the speed of the wheels. If thewheels are going to lock, the ABSsystem repeatedly modulates thehydraulic brake pressure to thewheels.When you apply your brakes underconditions which may lock thewheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-responding sensation in the brakepedal. This is normal and it meansyour ABS system is active.In order to obtain the maximum ben-efit from your ABS system in anemergency situation, do not attemptto modulate your brake pressure anddo not try to pump your brakes.Press your brake pedal as hard aspossible or as hard as the situationwarrants and allow the ABS systemto control the force being delivered tothe brakes.

WARNING - ABS BrakesYour ABS is not a substitute forgood driving judgement. Youcan still have an accident. Infact, your ABS system will prob-ably not be able to prevent anaccident in the following drivingconditions:• Dangerous driving, such as

neglecting safety precautions,speeding, or driving too closeto the vehicle in front of you.

• Driving at high speed in situa-tions providing considerablyless traction, such as wet con-ditions where hydroplaningcould occur.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Driving too fast on poor road

surfaces.The ABS is designedto improve maximum brakingeffectiveness on typical high-ways and roads in good con-dition. On poor road surfacesin poor condition, the ABSmay actually reduce brakingeffectiveness.


164

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

• Even with the anti-lock brake sys-tem, your vehicle still requires suf-ficient stopping distance. Alwaysmaintain a safe distance from thevehicle in front of you.

• Always slow down when cornering.The anti-lock brake system cannotprevent accidents resulting fromexcessive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces,operation of the anti-lock brakesystem may result in a longer stop-ping distance than for vehiclesequipped with a conventionalbrake system.

ABS

W-78

CAUTION• If the ABS warning light is on

and stays on, you may have aproblem with the ABS system.In this case, however, your reg-ular brakes will work normally.

• The ABS warning light will stayon for approximately 3 sec-onds after the ignition switchis ON. During that time, theABS will go through self-diag-nosis and the light will go off ifeverything is normal. If thelight stays on, you may have aproblem with your ABS sys-tem. Contact an authorized Kiadealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION• When you drive on a road hav-

ing poor traction, such as anicy road, and operate yourbrakes continuously, the ABSwill be active continuouslyand the ABS warning lightmay illuminate. Pull your carover to a safe place and stopthe engine.

• Restart the engine. If the ABSwarning light is off, then yourABS system is normal.Otherwise, you may have aproblem with the ABS.Contact an authorized Kiadealer as soon as possible.

4 17

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


✽✽ NOTICEWhen you jump start your vehiclebecause of a drained battery, theengine may not run as smoothly andthe ABS warning light may turn onat the same time. This happensbecause of the low battery voltage. Itdoes not mean your ABS is malfunc-tioning.• Do not pump your brakes!• Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.


184

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Power steeringPower Steering uses energy from theengine to assist you in steering thevehicle. If the engine is off or if thepower steering system becomesinoperative, the vehicle may still besteered, but it will require increasedsteering effort.Should you notice any change in theeffort required to steer during normalvehicle operation, have the powersteering checked by an AuthorizedKia Dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the vehicle is parked for extendedperiods outside in cold weather(below -10 °C/14 °F), the powersteering may require increasedeffort when the engine is first start-ed. This is caused by increased fluidviscosity due to the cold weather anddoes not indicate a malfunction.When this happens, increase theengine RPM by depressing accelera-tor until the RPM reaches 1,500 rpmthen release or let the engine idle fortwo or three minutes to warm up thefluid.

STEERING WHEEL

CAUTION• Never hold the steering wheel

against a stop (extreme rightor left turn) for more than 5seconds with the engine run-ning. Holding the steeringwheel for more than 5 sec-onds in either position maycause damage to the powersteering pump.

• If the power steering drive beltbreaks or if the power steeringpump malfunctions, the steer-ing effort will greatly increase.

4 19

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Tilt steering (if equipped)A tilt steering wheel allows you toadjust the steering wheel before youdrive. You can also raise it to thehighest level to give your legs moreroom when you exit and enter thevehicle.

The steering wheel should be posi-tioned so that it is comfortable foryou to drive, while permitting you tosee the instrument panel warninglights and gauges. To change the steering wheel angle,

pull down (1) the lock release lever,adjust the steering wheel to thedesired angle (2), then pull up thelock-release lever to lock the steeringwheel in place.Be sure to adjust the steering wheelto the desired position before driving.

WARNING • Never adjust the angle of

steering wheel while driving.You may lose your steeringcontrol and cause severe per-sonal injury or accidents.

• After adjusting, push thesteering wheel both up anddown to be certain it is lockedin position.

OLD026076


204

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

HornTo sound the horn, press the hornsymbol on your steering wheel.Check the horn regularly to be sure itoperates properly.

CAUTION• To sound the horn, press the

area indicated by the hornsymbol on your steeringwheel (see illustration). Thehorn will operate only whenthis area is pressed.

• Do not strike the horn severelyto operate it, or hit it with yourfist. Do not press on the hornwith a sharp-pointed object.OLD026077

4 21

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


The cruise control system allows youto program the vehicle to maintain aconstant speed without resting yourfoot on the accelerator pedal.This system is designed to functionabove approximately 40 km/h (24mph).

To set cruise control speed:1. Push the CRUISE ON/OFF button

on the steering wheel, to turn thesystem on. The CRUISE indicatorlight in the instrument cluster willilluminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed,which must be more than 40 km/h(24 mph).

CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - Cruise control

Do not use the cruise controlfeature under the following con-ditions:• Heavy or unsteady traffic• Slippery or winding roads• Situations that involve varying

speeds• Pay particular attention during

the down-hill driving withcruise control system as thevehicle speed can beincreased gradually.

WARNINGIf the cruise control is left on,(CRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster illuminated)the cruise control can beswitched on accidentally. Keepthe cruise control system off(CRUISE indicator light OFF)when cruise control is not inuse.

1LDN4024


224

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

3. Push down the SET/COAST switch,and release it at the speed youwant.The “SET” indicator light in theinstrument cluster will illuminate.Release the accelerator at thesame time. The desired speed willautomatically be maintained.

The SET function cannot be activateduntil approximately 2 seconds after theCRUISE ON-OFF button has beenengaged.On a steep grade, the vehicle maymomentarily slow down while goingdownhill.

To cancel cruise control, doone of the following:• Press the brake pedal.• Shift into N (Neutral).• Pull the CANCEL switch.Each of these actions will cancelcruise control operation (the “SET”indicator light in the instrument clus-ter will go OFF), but it will not turn thesystem off. If you wish to resumecruise control operation, push up theRES/ACC switch located on yoursteering wheel.You will return to yourpreviously preset speed.

To turn cruise control off, doone of the following:• Push the CRUISE ON-OFF button

(the CRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster will go OFF).

• Turn the ignition off.Both of these actions cancel cruisecontrol operation. If you want toresume cruise control operation,repeat the steps provided in “To SetCruise Control Speed” on the previ-ous page.

1LDN4025 1LDN4025A

4 23

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


To increase cruise control setspeed:Follow either of these procedures:• Push up the RES/ACC switch and

hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.Release the switch at the speed youwant.

• Push up the RES/ACC switch andrelease it immediately. The cruisingspeed will increase 1.6 km/h (1mph) by one touch and will be mem-orized to the reset speed.

To temporarily accelerate withthe cruise control onIf you want to speed up temporarilywhen the cruise control is on,depress the accelerator pedal.Increased speed will not interferewith cruise control operation orchange the set speed.To return to the set speed, take yourfoot off the accelerator.

To decrease the cruisingspeed:Follow either of these procedures:• Push down the SET/COAST switch

and hold it. Your vehicle will gradu-ally slow down. Release the switchat the speed you want to maintain.

• Push down the SET/COAST switchand release it immediately. Thecruising speed will decrease 1.6km/h (1 mph) by one touch and willbe memorized to the reset speed.

1LDN4026 1LDN4025


244

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To resume cruising speed atmore than 40 km/h (24 mph):If any method other than theCRUISE ON-OFF switch was usedto cancel cruising speed and the sys-tem is still activated, the most recentset speed will automatically resumewhen the RES/ACC switch is pushedup.It will not resume, however, if thevehicle speed has dropped below40km/h (24 mph).

1LDN4026

4 25

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


The Traction Control System (TCS)helps the vehicle accelerate on slip-pery road surfaces by preventing thedrive wheels from spinning exces-sively. It also provides improved driv-ing force and steering.

TCS operationTCS ON condition

• When the ignition is turnedON, TCS and TCS OFFindicator light illuminate forapproximately 3 seconds,then TCS is turned on.

• Press the TCS button toturn TCS off. (TCS OFFindicator will illuminate). Toturn the TCS on, press theTCS button (TCS OFFindicator light will go off).

• When starting the engine,you may hear a slight tick-ing sound. This is the TCSperforming an automaticsystem self-check and doesnot indicate a problem.

When operatingWhen the TCS is in opera-tion, TCS indicator lightblinks.• When the traction control

system is operating prop-erly, you can feel a slightpulsation in the vehicle.This is only the effect ofbrake control and indi-cates nothing unusual.

• When moving out of mudor driving on a slipperyroad, pressing the accel-erator pedal may notcause the engine rpm(revolutions per minute) toincrease.

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

- TCS

OLD026118


264

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

TCS operation offTCS OFF state

• To cancel TCS operation,press the TCS button(TCS OFF indicator lightilluminates).

• If the ignition switch isturned to LOCK positionwhen TCS is off, TCSremains off. Upon restart-ing the engine, the TCS willautomatically turn onagain.

Indicator lightWhen ignition switch is turned to ON,the indicator light illuminates, thengoes off if TCS system is operatingnormally.The TCS indicator light blinks when-ever TCS is operating.TCS OFF indicator light comes onwhen either the TCS is turned offwith the button, or TCS fails to oper-ate when turned on.

TCSOFF

TCS

TCSOFF

■ TCS indicator light (blinks)

■ TCS OFF indicator light (comes on)

WARNINGThe Traction Control System isonly a driving aid; use precau-tions for safe driving by slowingdown on curved, snowy, or icyroads.

4 27

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


TCS OFF usageWhen driving• It’s a good idea to keep the TCS

turned on for daily driving whenev-er possible.

• To turn TCS off while driving, pressthe TCS button while driving on aflat road surface.

Never press TCS button while TCS isoperating (TCS indicator light blinks).If TCS is turned off while TCS isoperating, the vehicle may slip out ofcontrol.

✽✽ NOTICE• When measuring the vehicle speed

with a Chassis dynamometer,make sure the TCS is turned off(TCS OFF light illuminated). Ifthe TCS is left on, it may preventthe vehicle speed from increasing,and cause a false diagnosis of afaulty speedometer.

• Turning the TCS off does notaffect ABS or brake system opera-tion.

WARNING - TCS Never press the TCS buttonwhile TCS is operating.If the TCS is turned off whileTCS is operating, the vehiclemay slip out of control.To turn TCS off while driving,press the TCS button while driv-ing on a flat road surface.


284

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Tachometer

2. Turn signal indicators

3. Speedometer

4. Engine temperature gauge

5. Warning and indicator lights

6. Odometer / Tripmeter

7. Shift position indicator (Automatic transaxle only)

8. Fuel gauge

OLD026090C-C

4 29

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Speedometer The speedometer indicates the for-ward speed of the vehicle.

Odometer/TripmeterYou can choose the odometer, trip-meter A or tripmeter B by pressingthe TRIP button.

OdometerThe odometer indicates the total dis-tance the vehicle has been driven.

TripmeterTRIP A: Tripmeter ATRIP B: Tripmeter BThe tripmeter indicates the distanceof individual trips selected by thedriver. Tripmeter A and B can bereset to 0 by pressing the TRIP but-ton for 1 second or more, and thenreleasing.

Tachometer The tachometer indicates theapproximate number of engine revo-lutions per minute (rpm).Use the tachometer to select the cor-rect shift points and to prevent lug-ging and/or over-revving the engine.The tachometer pointer may moveslightly when the ignition switch is inACC or ON position with the engineOFF. This movement is normal andwill not affect the accuracy of thetachometer once the engine is run-ning.

GAUGES

OLD026200L

CAUTIONDo not operate the engine with-in the tachometer's RED ZONE.This may cause severe enginedamage.


304

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Engine temperature gauge This gauge shows the temperatureof the engine coolant when the igni-tion switch is ON.Do not continue driving with an over-heated engine. If your vehicle over-heats, refer to “Overheating” in theIndex.

Fuel gaugeThe fuel gauge indicates the approx-imate amount of fuel remaining in thefuel tank.Fuel tank capacity - 55 litres (14.52US gal. ).The fuel gauge is supplemented by alow fuel warning light, which will illu-minate when the fuel level hasdropped to about 8.5 liters (2.25 USgal.).

Instrument panel illuminationWhen the vehicle’s parking lights orheadlights are on, rotate the illumina-tion control knob to adjust the instru-ment panel illumination intensity.

OLD026204N

CAUTIONIf the gauge pointer movesbeyond the normal range areatoward the “H” position, it indi-cates overheating that maydamage the engine.

4 31

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Warning lights / audible indi-cators Checking operation All warning lights are checked byturning the ignition switch ON (do notstart the engine). Any light that doesnot illuminate should be checked byan Authorized Kia Dealer.After starting the engine, check tomake sure that all warning lights areoff. If any are still on, this indicates asituation that needs attention. Whenreleasing the parking brake, thebrake system warning light should gooff. The fuel warning light will stay onif the fuel level is low.

Anti-lock brake sys-tem (ABS) warninglight (if equipped) This light illuminates if the key isturned to ON and goes off in approx-imately 3 seconds if the system isoperating normally.If the light stays on, you may have aproblem with your ABS system.Contact an authorized Kia dealer assoon as possible.

Electronic brake forcedistribution (EBD)system warning light (if equipped)If two warning lights illumi-nate at the same timewhile driving, your vehiclehas a problem with ABSand EBD system.

In this case, your ABS system andregular brake system may not worknormally. Have the vehicle checkedby an Authorized Kia Dealer as soonas possible.

WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

ABS

ABS

WARNINGIf the both ABS and Brake warn-ing lights are ON and stay ON,your vehicle’s brake system willnot work normally. So you mayexperience an unexpected anddangerous situation during sud-den braking. In this case, avoidhigh speed driving and abruptbraking. Have your vehiclechecked by Authorized KiaDealer as soon as possible.


324

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Engine oil pressurewarning

This warning light indicates theengine oil pressure is low.If the warning light illuminates whiledriving:1. Drive safely to the side of the road

and stop.2. With the engine off, check the

engine oil level. If the level is low,add oil as required.

If the warning light remains on afteradding oil or if oil is not available, callan Authorized Kia Dealer.

Charging system warning

This warning light indicates a mal-function of either the generator orelectrical charging system.If the warning light comes on whilethe vehicle is in motion:1. Drive to the nearest safe location.2. With the engine off, check the gen-

erator drive belt for looseness orbreakage.

3. If the belt is adjusted properly, aproblem exists somewhere in theelectrical charging system. Havean Authorized Kia Dealer correctthe problem as soon as possible.

Safety belt warning

If the driver's lap/shoulder belt is notfastened when the ignition switch isturned ON, the safety belt warninglight and chime will activate for about6 seconds. And if the lap/shoulderbelt is fastened when the ignitionswitch is turned ON, the safety beltwarning light will blink for about 6seconds.If the lap/shoulder belt is unfastenedwhile the lap/shoulder belt is fas-tened with the ignition switch ON, thesafety belt warning light will blink forabout 6 seconds and if the vehiclespeed exceeds 10 km/h the safetybelt warning light and chime will acti-vate until it is fastened.

CAUTIONIf the engine is not stoppedimmediately, severe damagecould result.

4 33

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Rear window defrosterindicator (if equipped)

This light comes on when the reardefroster switch is depressed toremove the frost on the rear glass.Press the switch again to shut off thedefroster when the frost is removed.The rear window defroster will auto-matically turn off after 20 minutes.It will also turn off whenever youremove the ignition key.

Shift pattern indicators(if equipped)

The individual indicators illuminate toshow the automatic transaxle shiftlever selection.

Door ajar warning

This warning light illuminates when adoor is not closed securely with theignition in any position.

Immobilizer indicator (if equipped)

This light illuminates when the immo-bilizer key is inserted and turned tothe ON position to start the engine.If this light turns off or blinks whenthe ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion before starting the engine, havethe system checked by an authorizedKia Dealer.

Parking brake & brakefluid warning Parking brake warning This light is illuminated when theparking brake is applied with the igni-tion switch in the START or ON posi-tion. The warning light should go offwhen the parking brake is released.

Low brake fluid level warningIf the warning light remains on, it mayindicate that the brake fluid level inthe reservoir is low.If the warning light remains on:1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.2. With the engine stopped, check

the brake fluid level immediatelyand add fluid as required. Thencheck all brake components forfluid leaks.


344

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaksare found, the warning lightremains on or the brakes do notoperate properly. Have it towed toany Authorized Kia Dealer for abrake system inspection and nec-essary repairs.

To check bulb operation, checkwhether the parking brake and brakefluid warning light illuminates whenthe ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion.

Trunk lid openwarning (if equipped)

This warning light activates when thetrunk is not closed securely.Stop the vehicle and close the lid.

Low fuel level warning

This warning light indicates the fueltank is nearly empty. The warninglight will come on when the fuel levelhas dropped to about 8.5 liters (2.25US gal.). Refuel as soon as possible.

Headlight high beamindicator

This indicator illuminates when theheadlights are on and in the highbeam position or when the turn sig-nal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position.

Front fog light indica-tor (if equipped)

This light comes on when the frontfog lights are ON.

Low washer fluid levelwarning indicator

This warning light indicates thewasher fluid reservoir is near empty.Refill the washer fluid as soon aspossible.

WARNINGDriving the vehicle with a warn-ing light on is dangerous. If thebrake warning light remains on,have the brakes checked andrepaired immediately by anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

4 35

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Malfunction indicator (if equipped)

This indicator light is part of theEngine Control System which moni-tors various emission control systemcomponents. If this light illuminateswhile driving, it indicates that apotential problem has been detectedsomewhere in the emission controlsystem.Generally, your vehicle will continueto be drivable and will not need tow-ing, but have the system checked byan Authorized Kia Dealer as soon aspossible.

✽✽ NOTICEA loose fuel filler cap may cause theOn Board Diagnostic SystemMalfunction Indicator Light ( )in the instrument panel to illuminateunnecessarily. Always make surethat the fuel filler cap is tight.

Air bag warning (if equipped)

This warning light will blink or illumi-nate for approximately 6 secondseach time you turn the ignition switchto the ON position.If this indicator does not go out, or ifit illuminates while the vehicle isbeing driven, see an Authorized KiaDealer for immediate service.

CHECKCHECK

CHECKCHECKCAUTION

• Prolonged driving with theEmission Control SystemMalfunction Indicator Light ( ) illuminated may causedamage to the emission con-trol systems which couldeffect drivability and/or fueleconomy.

• If the Emission Control SystemMalfunction Indicator Light( ) begins to flash ON andOFF, potential catalytic con-verter damage is possiblewhich could result in loss ofengine power. Have the EngineControl System inspected assoon as possible by anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

CHECKCHECK

CHECKCHECK


364

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Auto cruise indicator(if equipped)CRUISE indicator

The indicator light illuminates whenthe cruise control system is enabled.

SET indicator

The indicator light illuminates whenthe cruise function switch (COAST/SET or RES/ACCEL) is ON.

TCS indicator (Traction ControlSystem) (if equipped)

The TCS indicator will illuminatewhen the ignition switch is turnedON, but should go off after approxi-mately 3 seconds. When the TCS ison, it monitors the driving conditionsand under normal driving conditions,the TCS light will remain off. When aslippery or low traction condition isencountered, the TCS will operate,and the TCS indicator will blink toindicate the TCS is operating.

TCS OFF indicator(if equipped)

The TCS OFF indicator will illuminatewhen the ignition switch is turnedON, but should go off after approxi-mately 3 seconds. To switch to TCSOFF mode, press the TCS button.The TCS OFF indicator will illuminateindicating the TCS is deactivated.If this indicator stays on in the TCSON mode, the TCS may have a mal-function. Take your car to the author-ized Kia dealer and have the systemchecked.

CRUISE

SET

TCS TCSOFF

4 37

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Key reminder warning chimeIf the driver’s door is opened and theignition key is left in with the ignitionswitch in the LOCK or ACC position,the key reminder warning chime willsound. This is to prevent you fromlocking your keys in the vehicle.

Low tire pressure telltale (if equipped)

The low tire pressure telltale comeson for 3 seconds after the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON position.If the warning light does not comeon, or continuously remains on aftercoming on for about 3 seconds whenyou turned the ignition switch to theON position, the Tire PressureMonitoring System is not workingproperly. If this occurs, have yourvehicle checked by an authorizedKIA dealer as soon as possible.This warning light will also illuminateif one or more of your tires is signifi-cantly under-inflated. You shouldstop and check your tires as soon aspossible. If the warning light illumi-nates while driving, reduce vehiclespeed immediately and stop thevehicle. Avoid hard braking and over-correcting at the steering wheel.Inflate the tires to the proper pres-sure as indicated on the vehicle’s tireinformation placard.

WARNING - Low tire pres-sure

Significantly low tire pressuremakes the vehicle unstable andcan contribute to loss of vehiclecontrol and increased brakingdistances.Continued driving on low pres-sure tires will cause the tires tooverheat and fail.


384

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

TPMS (Tire pressuremonitoring system) malfunction indicator (if equipped)TPMS malfunction indicator comeson for 3 seconds after the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON position. Ifthe warning light does not come on,or continuously remains on aftercoming on for about 3 seconds whenyou turned the ignition switch to theON position, the Tire PressureMonitoring System is not workingporperly. If this occurs, have yourvehicle checked by an authorizedKIA dealer as soon as possible.The warning light also comes on andstays on when there is a problemwith the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem.If this happens, the system may notmonitor the tire pressure. Have thesystem checked by an authorizedKIA dealer as soon as possible.

TPMS WARNING - Safe stopping• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire dam-age caused by external fac-tors.

• If you feel any vehicle instabil-ity, immediately take your footoff the accelerator, apply thebrakes gradually and withlight force, and slowly move toa safe position off the road.

4 39

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Battery saver function • The purpose of this feature is to

prevent the battery from being dis-charged. The system automaticallyturns off the small light when thedriver removes the ignition key andopens the driver- side door.

• With this feature, the parklight willbe turned off automatically if thedriver parks on the side of road atnight.

If necessary, to keep the lights onwhen the ignition key is removed,perform the following :1) Open the driver-side door.2) Turn the parklights OFF and ON

again using the light switch on thesteering column.

Lighting control The light switch has a Headlight anda Parklight position.To operate the lights, turn the knob atthe end of the control lever to one ofthe following positions:➀ OFF position➁ Parklight position➂ Headlight position

Parklight position ( )When the light switch is in the park-light position (1st position), the tail,position, license and instrumentpanel lights are ON.

LIGHTING

OLD026102OLD026101C


404

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Headlight position ( )When the light switch is in the head-light position (2nd position) the head,tail, position, license and instrumentpanel lights are ON.

High - beam operation To turn on the high beam headlights,push the lever away from you. Pull itback for low beams.The high-beam indicator will lightwhen the headlight high beams areswitched on.To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not leave the lightson for a prolonged time while theengine is not running.

Flashing headlights To flash the headlights, pull the levertowards you. It will return to the nor-mal (low-beam) position whenreleased. The headlight switch doesnot need to be on to use this flashingfeature.

OLD026103 OLD026106 OLD026105

4 41

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Turn signals (A)The ignition switch must be on for theturn signals to function. To turn onthe turn signals, move the lever up ordown. Green arrow indicators on theinstrument panel indicate which turnsignal is operating. They will self-cancel after a turn is completed. Ifthe indicator continues to flash aftera turn, manually return the lever tothe OFF position.

Lane change signals (B)To signal a lane change, move theturn signal lever slightly and hold it inposition. The lever will return to theOFF position when released.If an indicator stays on and does notflash or if it flashes abnormally, oneof the turn signal bulbs may beburned out and will require replace-ment.

✽✽ NOTICEIf an indicator flash is abnormallyquick or slow, bulb may be burnedout or have a poor electrical connec-tion in the circuit.

Front fog light (if equipped) Fog lights are used to provideimproved visibility and avoid acci-dents when visibility is poor due tofog, rain or snow etc. The fog lightswill turn on when fog light switch (1)is turned to ON after the headlightswitch is turned on.To turn off the fog lights, turn theswitch to OFF.

1LDN2107 OLD026115


424

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Daytime running light (if equipped)Daytime Running Lights (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, and it is especial-ly helpful after dawn and before sun-set.The DRL system will make yourheadlights turn OFF when:1. The head light switch is ON.2. The parking brake engaged.3. Engine stops.

CAUTIONWhen in operation, the foglights consume large amountsof vehicle electrical power. Onlyuse the fog lights when visibilityis poor or unnecessary batteryand generator drain couldoccur.

4 43

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Windshield wipers Operates as follows when the igni-tion switch is turned ON.OFF : Wiper is not in operationINT : Wiper operates intermittently

at the same wiping intervals.Use this mode in a light rain ormist. To vary the speed set-ting, turn the speed controlknob (1).

LO : Normal wiper speedHI : Fast wiper speed

: For a single wiping cycle, pushthe lever forward and release itwith the lever in the OFF posi-tion. The wipers will operatecontinuously if the lever ispushed upward and held.

✽✽ NOTICEIf there is heavy accumulation ofsnow or ice on the windshield,defrost the windshield for about 10minutes, or until the snow and/or iceis removed before using the wind-shield wipers to ensure proper oper-ation.

WIPERS AND WASHERS

OLD026108N

CAUTION• To prevent possible damage

to the wipers or windshield,do not operate the wiperswhen the windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to thewiper blades, do not use gaso-line, kerosene, paint thinner,or other solvents on or nearthem.

• To prevent damage to thewiper arms and other compo-nents, do not attempt to movethe wipers manually.


444

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Windshield washers In the OFF position, pull the levergently toward you to spray washerfluid on the windshield and to run thewipers 2-3 cycles.Use this function when the wind-shield is dirty.The spray and wiper operation willcontinue until you release the lever.

If the washer does not work, checkthe washer fluid level. If the fluid levelis not sufficient, you will need to addappropriate non-abrasive windshieldwasher fluid to the washer reservoir.The reservoir filler neck is located inthe front of the engine compartmenton the passenger side.

Rear window wiper and wash-er switch (if equipped)The rear window wiper and washerswitch is located at the end of thewiper and washer switch lever. Turnthe switch to desired position tooperate the rear wiper and washer.

- Spraying washer fluid and wip-ing

INT - Intermittent wiper operation ON - Normal wiper opertion

- Spraying washer fluid and wip-ing

OLD026109N

WARNINGDo not use the washer in freez-ing temperatures without 1stwarming the windshield with thedefrosters; the washer solutioncould freeze on contact with thewindshield and obscure yourvision.

OLD027110N

CAUTIONTo prevent possible damage tothe washer pump, do not oper-ate the washer when the fluidreservoir is empty.

4 45

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


The defroster heats the window toremove frost, fog and thin ice fromthe interior and exterior of the rearwindow, while engine is running.

To activate the rear windowdefroster, press the rear windowdefroster button located in the centerconsole switch panel. The indicatorin the instrument cluster illuminateswhen the defroster is ON.If your vehicle is equipped with theoutside mirror defroster, it will beoperating at the same time when youoperate the rear window defroster.If there is heavy accumulation ofsnow on the rear window, brush it offbefore operating the rear defroster.The rear window defroster automati-cally turns off after 20 minutes orwhen the ignition switch is turned off.To turn off the defroster, press therear window defroster button again.

DEFROSTER

OLD026116N

CAUTION• To prevent damage to the con-

ductors bonded to the insidesurface of the rear window,never use sharp instrumentsor window cleaners contain-ing abrasives to clean the win-dow.

• To prevent the battery frombeing discharged, operate thedefroster only while theengine is running.

• If you want to defrost anddefog on the front windshield,refer to “Windshield Defrostingand Defogging” in this section.


464

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The hazard warning flasher causesthe rear tail lights and front turn sig-nal lights to flash on and off, whichserves as a warning to other driversto exercise caution when approach-ing or passing your vehicle.To activate the flasher, depress thehazard warning flasher switch. Thisswitch operates in any ignition switchposition.To turn the flashers off, depress theswitch again.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

OLD026100

4 47

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OLD026120N

1. Fan speed control knob

2. Mode selection knob

3. Temperature control knob

4. Rear window defroster button

5. Air intake control button

6. Air conditioning button (if equipped)

1 2 3

54 6


484

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Fan speed control knob The ignition switch must be in the ONposition for fan operation.The fan speed control knob allowsyou to control the fan speed of the airflowing from the ventilation system.To change the fan speed, turn theknob to the right for higher speed orleft for lower speed.

Temperature control knobThe temperature control knob allowsyou to control the temperature of theair flowing from the ventilation sys-tem.To change the air temperature inthe passenger compartment turn theknob to the right for warm and hot airor left for cooler air.

Mode selection knob The mode selection knob controlsthe direction of the air flow throughthe ventilation system.

OLD026126N OLD026124 OLD026202N

4 49

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


MAX/ A/C position When you select the MAXA/C mode while the fanspeed is on, the follwingsystem settings will bemade automatically;• the air conditioning sys-

tem will be turned on.• the recirculated air posi-

tion will be selected.• the face mode will be

selected.If you select MAX A/Cmode, you will not be ableto cancel the A/C systemoperation, or change therecirculated air mode posi-tion.Set the fan speed controlknob to desired speed androtate the temperaturecontrol knob to theextreme left position formaximum cooling.(outlet port: B, D)

MAXA/C

OLD026121


504

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Face position Air flow is directed towardthe upper body and face.Additionally, each outletcan be controlled to directthe air discharged fromthe outlet.(outlet port: B, D)

Face - floor position Air flow is directed towardsthe face and the floor. Theair to the floor is warmerthan the air to the face(except when the temper-ature control is set to theextreme cold position).(outlet port: B, D, C, E)

Floor position Most of the air flow isdirected to the floor, with asmall amount of the airbeing directed to the wind-shield and side windowdefroster.(outlet port: C, E, A, D)

Floor - defrost position Most of the air flow isdirected to the floor andthe windshield with a smallamount directed to theside window defrosters.(outlet port: A, C, E, D)

Defrost position Most of the air flow isdirected to the windshieldwith a small amount of airdirected to the side win-dow defrosters.(outlet port: A, D)

Instrument panel ventsIf air flow control is not satisfactory,check the instrument panel vents.The outlet port (B, D) can be openedor closed separately using the verti-cal thumbwheel. To close the vent,rotate it upward to the maximumposition. To open the vent, rotate itdownward.Also, you can adjust the direction ofair delivery from these vents usingvertical or horizontal thumbwheelsas shown.

OLD026122

4 51

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Air intake control button This is used to select outside (fresh)air position or recirculated air posi-tion.To change the air intake control posi-tion, push the control button.

Recirculated air position The indicator light on thebutton is illuminated whenthe recirculated air posi-tion is selected.With the recirculated airposition selected, air frompassenger compartmentwill be drawn through theheating system and heat-ed or cooled according tothe function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position The indicator light on thebutton is not illuminatedwhen the outside (fresh)air position is selected.With the outside (fresh) airposition selected, airenters the vehicle fromoutside and is heated orcooled according to thefunction selected.

OLD026125N


524

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

✽✽ NOTICEProlonged use of the air condition-ing with the “recirculated air posi-tion” selected, will result in exces-sively dry air in the passenger com-partment.

Air conditioning button (if equipped) Push the A/C button to turn the airconditioning system on (indicatorlight will illuminate). Push the buttonagain to turn the air conditioning sys-tem off.

WARNING - Reciruclatedair

• Continued climate controlsystem operation in the recir-culated air position may allowhumidity to increase insidevehicle which may fog theglass and obscure visibility.

• Continued climate controlsystem operation in thereciruclated air position canslightly reduce oxygen levelswhich can lead to causedrowsiness or sleepiness, andloss of vehicle control. Set theair intake control to the out-side (fresh) air position asmuch as possible while driv-ing.

OLD026127

4 53

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


System OperationVentilation1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system (ifequipped) on.

• If cool air is desired at face level forbi-level operation, set the mode tothe position.

• If the windshield fogs up, set themode to the , position.

Air conditioning (if equipped) All Kia Air Conditioning Systems arefilled with environmentally friendlyR-134a refrigerant which is not dam-aging to the ozone layer.1. Start the engine. Push the air con-

ditioning button.2. Set the mode to the position.3. Set the air intake control to the

outside air or recirculated air posi-tion.

4. Set the temperature control knobto the desired position.

5. Set the fan speed control to thedesired speed.

6. Adjust the fan speed control andtemperature control to maintainmaximum comfort.

• If warmer air is desired at floorlevel for bi-level operation, set themode to the position andadjust the temperature control tomaintain maximum comfort.


544

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

• When maximum cooling is desired,set the temperature control to theextreme left position and set the airintake control to the recirculated airposition, then set the fan speedcontrol to the highest speed.

✽✽ NOTICE• When using the air conditioning

system, monitor the temperaturegauge closely while driving uphills or in heavy traffic when out-side temperatures are high. Airconditioning system operationmay cause engine overheating.Continue to use the blower fan butturn the air conditioning systemoff if the temperature gauge indi-cates engine overheating.

• With opening the windows inhumid weather air conditioningmay cause to make water drops.Be careful because excessive waterdrop may cause to damage electri-cal equipment. In this case, closethe windows and turn on the airconditioning system.

Air conditioning system oper-ation tips • If the vehicle has been parked in

direct sunlight during hot weather,open the windows for a short timeto let the hot air inside the vehicleescape.

• To help reduce moisture inside ofwindows on rainy humid days,decrease the humidity inside thevehicle by operating the air condi-tioning system.

• During air conditioning systemoperation, you may occasionallynotice a slight change in enginespeed at idle as the air condition-ing compressor cycles on. This is anormal system operation charac-teristics.

• Use the air conditioning systemevery month if only for a few min-utes to ensure maximum systemperformance.

• When using the air conditioningsystem, you may notice clear waterdripping (or even puddling) on theground under the passenger sideof the vehicle. This is a normal sys-tem operation characteristics.

• The air conditioning systemincludes a function that automati-cally turns the air conditioningcompressor off if engine coolanttemperature approaches an overheating level. The air conditioningcompressor operation will resumeonce engine coolant temperaturereturns to the normal range. Also,the air conditioning compressor isautomatically turned off for a fewseconds when the accelerator isfully depressed (wide open throt-tle).

• When operating the air condition-ing system use the outside (fresh)air position.

• Operating the air conditioning sys-tem in the recirculated air positiondoes provide maximum cooling,however, continual operation in thismode may cause the air inside thevehicle to become stale.

4 55

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Checking the amount of airconditioner refrigerant andcompressor lubricantWhen the amount of refrigerant islow, the performance of the air con-ditioning is reduced. Overfilling alsohas a bad influence on the air condi-tioning system.Therefore, if abnormal operation isfound, have the system inspected byan authorized Kia dealer.

Air conditioner refrigerant andcompressor lubricant

WARNING - AC serviceThe air conditioning systemshould be serviced by anauthorized Kia dealer. Improperservice may cause seriousinjury to the person performingthe service.

CAUTIONWhen the performance of the airconditioning system is reducedit is important that the correcttype and amount of oil andrefrigerant is used. Otherwise,damage to the compressor andabnormal system operationmay occur.


564

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To defog inside windshield 1. Select any fan speed.2. Select desired temperature.3. Select the or position.4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-

ditioning will be selected.If the air-conditioning and outside(fresh) air position are not selectedautomatically, press the correspon-ding button manually.

To defrost outside windshield 1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.2. Set the temperature to the

extreme hot position.3. Select the position.4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-

ditioning will be selected.If the air-conditioning and outside(fresh) air position are not selectedautomatically, press the correspon-ding button manually.

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

CAUTION - Windshieldheating

Do not use or positionduring cooling operation inextremely humid weather. Thedifference between the tempera-ture of the outside air and thatof the windshield could causethe outer surface of the wind-shield to fog up, causing loss ofvisibility. In this case, set themode selection knob to the position and fan speed controlknob to the lower speed.

OLD026139N OLD026140N

4 57

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


• For maximum defrosting, set thetemperature control to the extremeright/hot position and the fan speedcontrol to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desiredwhile defrosting or defogging, setthe mode to the floor- defrost posi-tion.

• Before driving, clear all snow andice from the windshield, rear win-dow, outside rear view mirrors, andall side windows.

• Clear all snow and ice from thehood and air inlet in the cowl grill toimprove heater and defroster effi-ciency and to reduce the probabili-ty of fogging up inside of the wind-shield.

Defogging logicTo reduce the probability of foggingup the inside of the windshield, theair intake is controlled automaticallyaccording to certain conditions suchas or position. To cancel orreturn the defogging logic, do the fol-lowing.

Manual climate control system1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position.2. Turn the mode selection knob to

the defrost position ( ).3. Push the air intake control button

( ) at least 5 times within 3 sec-onds.

The indicator light in the air intakecontrol button will blink 3 times with0.5 second of interval. It indicatesthat the defogging logic is canceledor returned to the programmed sta-tus.If the battery has been discharged ordisconnected, it resets to the defoglogic status.

OLD026143N


584

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Armed stageThe Theft-Alarm system is armedas follows.• After all doors, engine hood, and

trunk are locked, press the “LOCK”button on the transmitter once.The hazard flasher lights will flashonce. (At this time, the alarm doesnot sound.)

Alarm stageThe alarm will be activated when:• Any door is opened without using

the key or the transmitter.• The trunk lid is opened without

using the key or the transmitter.• The engine hood is opened.

The alarm will sound and the hazardwarning lights will blink for 27 sec-onds, then OFF for 10 seconds. ThisON/OFF cycle will be repeated threetimes. During this time, the enginewill not start.

Withheld alarmWhen the alarm is armed, the alarmwill not sound if the trunk lid isopened with either the key or thetransmitter.However, if the trunk lid is notopened completely within 30 sec-onds after unlocking with the trans-mitter, the alarm will sound. Also, ifany of the doors or hood is openedwhile the trunk lid is open and thealarm armed, the alarm will sound.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

HMR.082

4 59

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Disarmed stageThe armed stage will be deactivatedwhen:• The “ ” button on the transmit-

ter is pressed (hazard lamps willflash twice).But, after depressing unlock but-ton, unless you open the doorswithin 30 seconds all doors will belocked and into armed stage auto-matically.

• The ignition switch is in the “ON”position.

• Unlock the doors with the ignitionkey.

The alarm will be deactivated when:• The lock ( ), unlock ( ) or trunk

lid open ( ) button on thetransmitter is pressed.

• The ignition switch is in the “ON”position for 30 seconds or more.

• Unlock the doors with the ignitionkey.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the ignition key is in the ignitionswitch, the transmitter will not func-tion. Avoid trying to start the enginewith the alarm activated.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Fuel requirements / 5-2Emission control system / 5-3Before driving / 5-5Suggestions for economical operation / 5-6Special driving conditions / 5-7Vehicle load limit / 5-11Weight of the vehicle / 5-16Trailer towing / 5-17Label information / 5-25

Driving tips

Driving tips

25

FUEL REQUIREMENTSGasoline engine (unleaded)Your new Kia vehicle is designed touse only unleaded fuel with a mini-mum Octane Rating of 87 Anti-Knock Index (AKI).

✽✽ NOTICENEVER USE LEADED FUEL. Theuse of leaded fuel is detrimental tothe catalytic converter and willdamage the engine control system’soxygen sensor and affect emissioncontrol.Never add any fuel system cleaningagents to the fuel tank other thanwhat Kia has specified. (Consult anAuthorized Kia Dealer for details.)

Gasoline containing alcoholand methanolGasohol, a mixture of gasoline andethanol (also known as grain alco-hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-taining methanol (also known aswood alcohol) are being marketedalong with or instead of leaded orunleaded gasoline.Do not use gasohol containing morethan 10% ethanol, and do not usegasoline or gasohol containing anymethanol. Either of these fuels maycause drivability problems and dam-age to the fuel system.Discontinue using gasohol of anykind if drivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or driveability prob-lems may not be covered by themanufacturer’s warranty if they resultfrom the use of:1. Gasohol containing more than

10% ethanol.2. Gasoline or gasohol containing

methanol.3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CAUTIONNever use gasohol which con-tains methanol. Discontinue useof any gasohol product whichimpairs drivability.

5 3

Driving tips

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMThe emission control system of yourvehicle is covered by a written limitedwarranty. Please see the warrantyinformation contained in theWarranty & Consumer InformationManual in your vehicle.

Vehicle modifications This vehicle should not be modified.Modification of your Kia could affectits performance, safety or durability,may violate governmental safety andemissions regulations.In addition, damage or performanceproblems resulting from any modifi-cation may not be covered underwarranty.

Engine exhaust gas precau-tions (carbon monoxide)

• Carbon monoxide can be presentwith other exhaust fumes.Therefore, if you smell exhaustfumes of any kind inside your vehi-cle, have it inspected and repairedimmediately by an authorized Kiadealer. If you ever suspect exhaustfumes are coming into your vehi-cle, drive it only with all the win-dows fully open. Have your vehiclechecked and repaired immediately.

• Do not operate the engine in con-fined or closed areas (such asgarages) any more than what isnecessary to move the vehicle in orout of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in anopen area for more than a shorttime with the engine running,adjust the ventilation system (asneeded) to draw outside air into thevehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stoppedvehicle for any extended time withthe engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails tostart, excessive attempts to re-start the engine may cause dam-age to the emission control sys-tem.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

WARNINGEngine exhaust gases containcarbon monoxide (CO). Thoughcolorless and odorless, it isdangerous and could be lethal ifinhaled. Follow the instructionsfollowing to avoid CO impair-ment.

Driving tips

45

Operating precautions for cat-alytic converters

Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-alytic converter emission controldevice.Therefore, the following precautionsmust be observed:• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for

gasoline engine (unleaded).• Do not operate the vehicle when

there are signs of engine malfunc-tion, such as misfire or a noticeableloss of performance.

• Do not misuse or abuse theengine. Examples of misuse arecoasting with the ignition off anddescending steep grades in gearwith the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at highidle speed for extended periods (5minutes or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with anypart of the engine or emission con-trol system. All inspections andadjustments must be made by anauthorized Kia dealer.

Failure to observe these precautionscould result in damage to the catalyt-ic converter and to your vehicle.Additionally, such actions could voidyour warranties.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

WARNING - FireA hot exhaust system can igniteflammable items under yourvehicle. Do not park the vehicleover or near flammable objects,such as dry grass, paper,leaves, etc.

5 5

Driving tips

BEFORE DRIVING Before entering vehicle:• Be sure that all windows, outside

mirror(s), and outside lights areclean.

• Check the condition of the tires.• Check under the vehicle for any

sign of leaks.• Be sure there are no obstacles

behind you if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspections Fluid levels, such as engine oil,engine coolant, brake fluid, andwasher fluid should be checked on aregular basis, with the exact intervaldepending on the fluid. Furtherdetails are provided in Section 7,Maintenance.

Before starting • Close and lock all doors.• Position the seat so that all con-

trols are easily reached.• Adjust the inside and outside

rearview mirrors.• Be sure that all lights work.• Check all gauges.• Check the operation of warning

lights when the ignition switch isturned to the ON position.

• Release the parking brake andmake sure the brake warning lightgoes out.

For safe operation, be sure you arefamiliar with your vehicle and itsequipment.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

WARNING - Driving underthe influence of alcohol ordrugs

Drinking and driving is danger-ous. Drunk driving is the num-ber one contributor to the high-way death toll each year. Even asmall amount of alcohol willaffect your reflexes, perceptionsand judgement.You are much more likely tohave a serious accident if youdrink and drive.If you are drinking or takingdrugs, don’t drive. Do not ridewith a driver who has beendrinking or taking drugs.Choose a designated driver orcall a cab.Driving while under the influ-ence of drugs is as dangerousor more dangerous than drivingdrunk.

Driving tips

65

SUGGESTIONS FOR ECONOMICAL OPERATIONYour vehicle's fuel economy dependsmainly on your style of driving, whereyou drive and when you drive.Each of these factors affects howmany kilometers (miles) you can getfrom a liter (gallon) of fuel.To operateyour vehicle as economically as pos-sible, use the following driving sug-gestions to help save money in bothfuel and repairs:• Avoid lengthy warm-up idling.

Once the engine is runningsmoothly, begin driving.Remember, engine warm-up maytake a little longer on cold days.

• Save fuel by accelerating slowlyafter stopping.

• Keep the engine in tune and followthe recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule. This will increasethe life of all parts and lower youroperating costs.

• Do not use the air conditionerunnecessarily.

• Slow down when driving on roughroads.

• For longer tire life and better fueleconomy, always keep the tiresinflated to the recommended pres-sures.

• Maintain a safe distance from othervehicles to avoid sudden stops.This will reduce wear on brake lin-ings and pads. Driving in such away will also save fuel becauseextra fuel is required to accelerateback to driving speed.

• Do not carry unnecessary weightin the vehicle.

• Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. This can causeneedless wear, possible damageto the brakes, and poor fuel econo-my.

• Improper wheel alignment resultsin faster tire wear and lower fueleconomy.

• Open windows at high speeds canreduce fuel economy.

• Fuel economy is less in crosswindsand headwinds. To help offsetsome of this loss, slow down whendriving in these conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operatingcondition is important both for econ-omy and safety. Therefore, have anauthorized Kia dealer performscheduled inspections and mainte-nance.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

WARNING - Engine offduring motion

Never turn the engine off tocoast down hills or anytime thevehicle is in motion. The powersteering and power brakes willnot function properly withoutthe engine running. Instead,downshift to an appropriategear for engine braking effect.

5 7

Driving tips

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS Hazardous driving conditions When hazardous driving conditionsare encountered such as water,snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz-ards, follow these suggestions:• Drive cautiously and allow extra

distance for braking.• Avoid sudden movements in brak-

ing or steering.• When braking, pump the brake

pedal with a light up-and-downmotion until the vehicle is stopped.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,use second gear. Accelerate slow-ly to avoid spinning the drivewheels.

• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, orother non-slip material under thedrive wheels to provide tractionwhen stalled in ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the vehicle If it is necessary to rock the vehicleto free it from snow, sand, or mud,first turn the steering wheel right andleft to clear the area around yourfront wheels. Then, shift back andforth between 1 (First) and R(Reverse) in vehicles equipped witha manual transaxle or R (Reverse)and any forward gear in vehiclesequipped with an automatictransaxle. Do not race the engine,and spin the wheels as little as pos-sible. If you are still stuck after a fewtries, have the vehicle pulled out by atow vehicle to avoid engine overheat-ing and possible damage to thetransaxle.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

WARNING - DownshiftingDownshifting with an automatictransaxle, while driving on slip-pery surfaces can cause anaccident. The sudden change intire speed could cause the tiresto skid. Be careful when down-shifting on slippery surfaces.

CAUTIONProlonged rocking may causeengine over-heating, transaxledamage or failure, and tire dam-age.

WARNING Do not pump the brake pedal ona vehicle equipped with ABS.

Driving tips

85

Driving at night Because night driving presents morehazards than driving in the daylight,here are some important tips toremember:• Slow down and keep more dis-

tance between you and other vehi-cles, as it may be more difficult tosee at night, especially in areaswhere there may not be any streetlights.

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce theglare from other driver's head-lights.

• Keep your headlights clean andproperly aimed on vehicles notequipped with the automatic head-light aiming feature. Dirty orimproperly aimed headlights willmake it much more difficult to seeat night.

• Avoid staring directly at the head-lights of oncoming vehicles. Youcould be temporarily blinded, and itwill take several seconds for youreyes to readjust to the darkness.

Driving in the rain Rain and wet roads can make drivingdangerous, especially if you’re notprepared for the slick pavement.Here are a few things to considerwhen driving in the rain:• A heavy rainfall will make it harder

to see and will increase the dis-tance needed to stop your vehicle,so slow down.

• Keep your windshield wipingequipment in good shape. Replaceyour windshield wiper blades whenthey show signs of streaking ormissing areas on the windshield.

• If your tires are not in good condi-tion, making a quick stop on wetpavement can cause a skid andpossibly lead to an accident. Besure your tires are in good shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make iteasier for others to see you.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

WARNING - Spinning tiresDo not spin the wheels, espe-cially at speeds more than 56km/h (35 mph). Spinning thewheels at high speeds when thevehicle is stationary couldcause a tire to overheat, explodeand injure bystanders.

CAUTIONThe TCS system (if equipped)should be turned OFF prior torocking the vehicle.

5 9

Driving tips

• Driving too fast through large pud-dles can affect your brakes. If youmust go through puddles, try todrive through them slowly.

• If you believe you may have gottenyour brakes wet, apply them lightlywhile driving until normal brakingoperation returns.

Winter driving• We recommend that you carry

emergency equipment, including awindow scraper, windshield de-icer, a bag of sand or salt, flares, asmall shovel and jumper cables.

• Make sure you have sufficient eth-ylene-glycol coolant in the radiator.

• Check the battery condition andcables. Cold temperatures reducethe capacity of any battery, so itmust be in excellent condition toprovide enough winter startingpower.

• Make sure the engine oil viscosityis suitable for cold weather.

• Check the ignition system for looseconnections and damage.

• Use antifreeze-formulated wind-shield washer fluid. (Do not useengine coolant antifreeze.)

• Do not use the parking brake if itmight freeze. When parking, shiftto 1 (First) or R (Reverse) with amanual transaxle or P (Park) withan automatic transaxle and blockthe rear wheels.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Driving tips

105

Snow tires If you mount snow tires on your vehi-cle, make sure they are radial tires ofthe same size and load range as theoriginal tires. Mount snow tires on allfour wheels to balance your vehicle’shandling in all weather conditions.Keep in mind that the traction provid-ed by snow tires on dry roads maynot be as high as your vehicle's orig-inal equipment tires.You should drivecautiously even when the roads areclear. Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Do not install studded tires withoutfirst checking local and provincipalregulations for possible restrictionsagainst their use.

Driving in flooded areas Avoid driving through flooded areasunless you are sure the water is nohigher than the bottom of the wheelhub. Drive through any water slowly.Allow adequate stopping distancebecause brake performance may beaffected.After driving through water, dry thebrakes by gently applying them sev-eral times while the vehicle is movingslowly.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

WARNING - Snow tiresize

Snow tires should be equivalentin size and type to the vehicle'sstandard tires. Otherwise, thesafety and handling of yourvehicle may be adversely affect-ed.

5 11

Driving tips

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

Tire and loading informationlabelThe label located on the driver's doorsill gives the original tire size, coldtire pressures recommended for yourvehicle, the number of people thatcan be in your vehicle and vehiclecapacity weight.

Vehicle capacity weight:385 kg (849 lbs)Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-mum combined weight of occupantsand cargo. If your vehicle is equippedwith a trailer, the combined weightincludes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:Total : 5 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons, Rear seat : 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximumnumber of occupants including adriver, your vehicle may carry.However, the seating capacity maybe reduced based upon the weight ofall of the occupants, and the weightof the cargo being carried or towed.Do not overload the vehicle as thereis a limit to the total weight, or loadlimit including occupants and cargo,the vehicle can carry.

Towing capacity:Without trailer brakes:340 kg (750 lbs)With trailer brakes:680 kg (1500 lbs)Towing capacity is the maximumtrailer weight including its cargoweight, your vehicle can tow.

Cargo capacity:The cargo capacity of your vehiclewill increase or decrease dependingon the weight and the number ofoccupants and the tongue load, ifyour vehicle is equipped with a trail-er.

OLD056900N

OLD056901N

Type A

Type B

Driving tips

125

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Steps for determining correctload limit1. Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity. For example, ifthe "XXX" amount equals 635 kg(1400 lbs.), and there will be five68 kg (150 lbs.) passengers inyour vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 295 kg (650 lbs.).(635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg or1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-er, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of yourvehicle.

WARNING - Load distribu-tor

Your vehicle may become unsta-ble while towing if your vehicle isoverloaded to one side. Makesure that the load in the vehicle isdistributed equally to each sideof the centerline.

5 13

Driving tips

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

C190F01JM

Item Description Total

AVehicle Capacity 635 kg

Weight (1400 lbs)Subtract Occupant

B Weight 136 kg

68 kg (150 lbs) × 2(300 lbs)

CAvailable Cargo and 499 kg

Luggage weight (1100 lbs)

Example 1

A B C

C190F02JM




B Weight 340 kg

68 kg (150 lbs) × 5(750 lbs)



A B C

Example 2

C190F03JM




B Weight 390 kg

78 kg (172 lbs) × 5(860 lbs)



A B C

Example 3

Driving tips

145

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Refer to your vehicle's tire and load-ing information label for specificinformation about your vehicle'scapacity weight and seating posi-tions. The combined weight of thedriver, passengers and cargo shouldnever exceed your vehicle's capacityweight.

Vehicle certificationThe vehicle certification label islocated on the driver's door sill.This label shows the maximumallowable weight of the fully loadedvehicle. This is called the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). TheGVWR includes the weight of thevehicle, all occupants, fuel andcargo.

This label also tells you the maxi-mum weight that can be supportedby the front and rear axles, calledGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).To find out the actual loads on yourfront and rear axles, you need to goto a weigh station and weigh yourvehicle.Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out your loadequally on both sides of the center-line.

OLD056901C

5 15

Driving tips

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The label will help you decide howmuch cargo and installed equipmentyour vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle- like suitcases, tools, packages, oranything else - they are moving asfast as the vehicle. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is a crash,the items will keep going and cancause an injury if they strike the driv-er or a passenger.

WARNING - Over loading• Never exceed the GVWR for

your vehicle, the GAWR foreither the front or rear axleand vehicle capacity weight.Exceeding these ratings cancause an accident or vehicledamage.You can calculate theweight of your load by weigh-ing the items (or people)before putting them in thevehicle. Be careful not to over-load your vehicle.

• If you overload your vehicle,the tires can suddenly andwithout warning fail. The over-loading can also make yourvehicle unstable and dramati-cally increase braking dis-tance.This could cause you tolose control and crash.

WARNING - Loose cargoItems you carry inside yourvehicle can strike and injureoccupants in a sudden stop orsharp turn, or in a crash.• Put items in the trunk of your

vehicle. Try to spread theweight evenly.

• Never stack items, like suit-cases, inside the occupantcompartment.

• Do not leave an unsecuredchild restraint in your vehicle,since it can injure occupantsin a crash.

• When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secure it.

CAUTION• Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs wouldnot be covered by your war-ranty. Do not overload yourvehicle.

• Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not changeyour weight ratings. Ask yourdealer to help you load yourvehicle the right way.ignored.

Driving tips

165

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

WEIGHT OF THE VEHICLEThis section will guide you in theproper loading of your vehicle and/ortrailer, to keep your loaded vehicleweight within its design rating capa-bility, with or without a trailer.Properly loading your vehicle willprovide maximum return of the vehi-cle design performance. Before load-ing your vehicle, familiarize yourselfwith the following terms for determin-ing your vehicle's weight ratings, withor without a trailer, from the vehicle'sspecifications and the compliancelabel:Base curb weight This is the weight of the vehicleincluding a full tank of fuel and allstandard equipment. It does notinclude passengers, cargo, or option-al equipment.Vehicle curb weightThis is the weight of your new vehiclewhen you picked it up from your deal-er plus any aftermarket equipment.Cargo weightThis figure includes all weight addedto the Base Curb Weight, includingcargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross axle weight)This is the total weight placed oneach axle (front and rear) - includingvehicle curb weight and all payload.GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)This is the maximum allowableweight that can be carried by a singleaxle (front or rear). These numbersare shown on the vehicle certificationlabel.The total load on each axle mustnever exceed its GAWR.GVW (Gross vehicle weight)This is the Base Curb Weight plusactual Cargo Weight plus passen-gers.GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)This is the maximum allowableweight of the fully loaded vehicle(including all options, equipment,passengers and cargo). The GVWRis shown on the vehicle certificationlabel located on the driver’s door sill.GCW (Gross combined weight)This is the weight of the loaded vehi-cle (GVW) plus the weight of the fullyloaded trailer.

GCWR (Gross combined weightrating)This is the maximum allowableweight of the vehicle and the loadedtrailer - including all cargo and pas-sengers - that the vehicle can handlewithout risking damage. (Important :The towing vehicle's braking systemis rated for operation at GVWR, notGCWR. Separate functional brakesshould be used for safe control oftowed vehicles and for trailers weigh-ing an 340kg (750 lbs).) The GCWmust never exceed the GCWR.Maximum trailer weightThis is the highest possible weight ofa fully loaded trailer the vehicle cantow. It assumes a vehicle with onlymandatory options, no cargo, and adriver. The weight of other optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inyour vehicle will reduce the maxi-mum trailer weight your vehicle cantow.

5 17

Driving tips

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Calculating the load your vehiclecan tow1. Use the appropriate maximum

GCWR chart (in the Weight of theTrailer section in this chapter) foryour type of drive system andtransmission.

2. Weigh your vehicle.3. Subtract the weight of your vehicle

from the maximum GCWR in thechart. This is the maximum trailerweight your vehicle can tow. Itmust be below the maximum trail-er weight shown in the chart. Notethat the maximum trailer weightyour vehicle can tow depends onthe total weight of any cargo, pas-sengers and available equipmentin the vehicle.

To identify what the vehicle traileringcapacity is for your vehicle, youshould read the information in“Weight of the Trailer” that appearslater in this section. Remember thattrailering is different than just drivingyour vehicle by itself. Trailering caus-es major changes in handling, dura-bility, and fuel economy. Successful,safe trailering requires correct equip-ment, and cautious driving.

WARNING - Towing atrailer

If you don't use the correctequipment or you drive improp-erly, you can lose control whenyou pull a trailer. For example, ifthe trailer is too heavy, thebrakes may fail, and would atleast be ineffective to promptlystop the vehicle. You and yourpassenger could be seriously orfatally injured. We do not recom-mend towing a trailer. However,in the event there is a need totow a trailer, such as in an emer-gency, follow all the steps in thissection.

Item SpecificationMaximum trailer Without trailer brakes 340 (750)

weight kg (lbs.) With trailer brakes 680 (1500)

TRAILER TOWING

CAUTIONPulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and resultin costly repairs not covered byyour warranty.

Driving tips

185

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

This section contains many time-tested, important trailering tips andsafety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. Please read thissection carefully before you pull atrailer.Load-pulling components such asthe engine, transaxle, wheel assem-blies, and tires are forced to workharder against the load of the addedweight. The engine is required tooperate at relatively higher speedsand under greater loads. This addi-tional burden generates extra heatwhich creates more wear in engine,and a shortened engine life.The trail-er also adds considerably to windresistance, increasing the pullingrequirements.

If you do decide to pull a trailerHere are some important points ifyou decide to pull a trailer:• Consider using a sway control. You

can ask a hitch dealer about swaycontrol.

• After your odometer indicates 800km (500 miles) or more, you cantow a trailer. For the first 800 km(500 miles) that you tow a trailer,don’t drive over 80 km/h (50 mph)and don’t make starts at full throt-tle. This helps your engine andother parts of your vehicle “wear” inat the heavier loads.

• Always drive your vehicle at a mod-erate speed (less than 100 km/h(60 mph)).

• The important considerations haveto do with weight:

Weight of the trailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be? Itshould never weigh more than themaximum trailer weight with trailerbrakes. But even that can be tooheavy.If you feel that the trailer is adverselyaffecting the movement of your vehi-cle, reduce your speed, avoiduneven or winding roads, avoidroads with steep grades, and/or light-en your trailer load.

5 19

Driving tips

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Weight of the trailer tongueThe tongue load of any trailer is animportant weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossvehicle weight (GVW) of your vehiclesince that is the trailer weight push-ing down on the hitch on your vehi-cle. The rest of the trailer weight issitting on the trailer's wheels.The trailer tongue should weigh amaximum of 10% of the total loadedtrailer weight.After you've loaded the trailer, go to aWeigh Station and weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, tosee if the weights are proper. If theyaren’t, you may be able to correctthem simply by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.

Hitches It's important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds, largetrucks going by, and rough roads area few reasons why you’ll need theright hitch. Here are some rules tofollow:• Do not attach a trailer hitch which

requires you to alter other parts onyour vehicle.

• Never make a hole in your vehicleto accommodate a hitch.

• The bumpers on your vehicle arenot intended for hitches. Do notattach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to them. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

WARNING - Trailer bal-ance

• Never load a trailer with moreweight in the rear than in thefront. The front should beloaded with approximately60% of the total trailer load;the rear should be loaded withapproximately 40% of the totaltrailer load.

• Never exceed the maximumweight limits of the trailer ortrailer towing equipment.Improper loading can result indamage to your vehicle and/orpersonal injury. Check weightsand loading at a commercialscale or highway patrol officeequipped with scales.

• An improperly loaded trailercan cause loss of vehicle con-trol.

Driving tips

205

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Safety chains You should always attach chainsbetween your vehicle and your trail-er. Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer so that thetongue will not drop to the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chains maybe provided by the hitch manufactur-er or by the trailer manufacturer.Follow the manufacturer’s recom-mendation for attaching safetychains. Always leave just enoughslack so you can turn with your trail-er. And, never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer brakes If your trailer weighs more than themaximum weight for a trailer withoutbrakes, then the trailer needs its ownbrakes. You must consult with aknowledgeable and reputable trailervendor to determine which brakeequipped trailer is right for yourneeds. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for the trailer brakes soyou’ll be able to install, adjust andmaintain them properly.

Driving with a trailer Towing a trailer requires experience.You must gain that experience slow-ly and carefully which practicing withan unloaded or lightly loaded trailer.Before setting out for the open road,you must get to know your trailer.Acquaint yourself with the feel ofhandling and braking with the trailer.And always keep in mind that thevehicle you are driving is now a gooddeal longer and not nearly soresponsive as your vehicle is byitself.Before you start, check the trailerhitch and platform, safety chains,electrical connector(s), lights, tiresand mirror adjustment. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start your vehicleand trailer moving and then apply thetrailer brake controller by hand to besure the brakes are working.This letsyou check your electrical connectionat the same time.During your trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secure,and that the lights and any trailerbrakes are still working.

WARNINGDo not use a trailer with its ownbrakes unless you are absolute-ly certain that you have properlyset up the brake system. This isnot a task for amateurs. Use anexperienced, competent trailershop for this work.

5 21

Driving tips

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Following distance Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving your vehicle without a trailer.This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sud-den turns.

Passing You’ll need more passing distanceup ahead when you’re towing a trail-er. And, because you’re a good deallonger, you’ll need to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle beforeyou can return to your lane.

Backing up The trailer will go in the oppositedirection of the rear of your vehiclewhen backing up. This is very difficultfor an inexperienced trailer driver toget used to. To help you avoid mis-takes, hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. Then, to movethe trailer to the left, just hold thesteering wheel firmly and move yourhand to the left. To move the trailer tothe right, move your hand to theright. Always back up slowly and, ifpossible, have someone guide you.

Making turns When you’re turning with a trailer,make wider turns than normal. Dothis so your trailer won’t strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,or other objects. Avoid jerky or sud-den maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

Turn signals when towing a trailer When you tow a trailer, your vehiclehas to have a different turn signalflasher and extra wiring. The greenarrows on your instrument panel willflash whenever you signal a turn orlane change. Properly connected,the trailer lights will also flash to alertother drivers you’re about to turn,change lanes, or stop.When towing a trailer, the greenarrows on your instrument panel willflash for turns even if the bulbs onthe trailer are burned out. Thus, youmay think drivers behind you areseeing your signals when, in fact,they are not. It’s important to checkreqularly to be sure the trailer bulbsare still working.You must also checkthe lights every time you disconnectand then reconnect the wires.

Driving tips

225

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Do not connect a trailer lighting sys-tem directly to your vehicle’s lightingsystem. Use only an approved trailerwiring harness.Your Authorized Kia Dealer canassist you in installing the wiring har-ness.

Driving on grades Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before you start down a long orsteep downgrade. If you don’t shiftdown, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would gethot and no longer operate efficiently.On a long uphill grade, shift downand reduce your speed to around 70km/h (45 mph) to reduce the possi-bility of engine and transaxle over-heating.Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)when towing a trailer will minimizeheat buildup and extend the life ofyour transaxle.

WARNING - Trailer wiringharness

Failure to use an approved trail-er wiring harness could result indamage to the vehicle's electri-cal system, there by disablingthe brake light system resultingin an accident.

CAUTIONWhen towing a trailer on steepgrades especially (in excess of6%) pay close attention to theengine coolant temperaturegauge to ensure the enginedoes not overheat. If the needleof the coolant temperaturegauge moves across the dialtowards “H” (HOT), pull over andstop as soon as it is safe to doso, and allow the engine to idleuntil it cools down.You may pro-ceed once the engine hascooled sufficiently.

5 23

Driving tips

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Parking on hills Generally, you should not park yourvehicle, with a trailer attached, on ahill. People can be seriously or fatal-ly injured, and both your vehicle andthe trailer can be damaged if theybegin to move downhill.

However, if you ever have to parkyour trailer on a hill, here’s how to doit:1. Apply your brakes, but don’t shift

into gear.2. Have someone place chocks

(blocks of wood or metal intendedfor this purpose) under the down-hill sides of the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brakes until thechocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brakes. Apply yourparking brake, and then shift to R(Reverse) for a manual transaxleor P (Park) for an automatictransaxle.

5. Release the brakes.

When you are ready to leave afterparking on a hill 1. With the manual transaxle in

Neutral or automatic transaxle in P(Park), apply your brakes and holdthe brake pedal down while you:• Start your engine;• Shift into gear; and• Release the parking brake.

2. Slowly remove your foot from thebrake pedal.

3. Drive slowly forward until the trail-er is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

WARNING - Parking brakeIt can be dangerous to get out ofyour vehicle if the parking brakeis not firmly set or if the engineis still running. In either casethe vehicle can move suddenly.You or others could be serious-ly or fatally injured.

WARNING - Parking on ahill

Parking your vehicle on a hillwith a trailer attached is danger-ous. It could cause seriousinjury or death, should the trail-er break lose, or should the trail-er drag the vehicle downhill.

Driving tips

245

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Maintenance when trailer tow-ing Your vehicle will need service moreoften when you regularly pull a trail-er. Important items to pay particularattention to include engine oil, auto-matic transaxle fluid, axle lubricantand cooling system fluid. Brake con-dition is another important item tofrequently check. Each item is cov-ered in this manual, and the Indexwill help you find them quickly. Ifyou’re trailering, it’s a good idea toreview these sections before youstart your trip.Don’t forget to also maintain yourtrailer and hitch. Follow the mainte-nance schedule that accompaniedyour trailer and check it periodically.Preferably, conduct the check at thestart of each day’s driving. Mostimportantly, all hitch nuts and boltsshould be tight.

CAUTION• Due to higher load during

trailer usage, overheatingmight occur in hot days orduring uphill driving. If thecoolant gauge indicates over-heating, switch off the A/C andstop the vehicle in a safe areato cool down the engine.

• When towing check transaxlefluid more frequently.

• If your vehicle is not equippedwith the air conditioner, youshould install a condenser fanfor engine performance whentowing a trailer.

5 25

Driving tips

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

LABEL INFORMATION There are several important labelsand identification numbers locatedon your vehicle. The label locationsare identified in the illustrationsshown.

Vehicle identification number(VIN) To check the frame number underthe passenger seat, remove thecover by pulling one side markedwith “PULL”.

1LDA6001 1LD6001

1LDN6002 1LDN6003

Frame number

Vehicle certification label (MVSS label)

VIN label

VIN bar code

Driving tips

265

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Tire specification / pressurelabel

Engine number1LDN6001 OLD066005

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Road warning / 6-2Tires pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-3Overheating / 6-8Emergency starting / 6-9Electrical circuit protection / 6-12Towing / 6-19If you have a flat tire / 6-24



26

ROAD WARNING

Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher servesas a warning to other drivers to exer-cise extreme caution whenapproaching, overtaking, or passingyour vehicle. It should be used when-ever emergency repairs are beingmade or when the vehicle is stoppednear the edge of a roadway.Depress the flasher switch with theignition switch in any position. Theflasher switch is located in the centerconsole switch panel. All turn signallights will flash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher oper-ates whether your vehicle is run-ning or not.

• The turn signals do not work whenthe hazard flasher is on.

• Care must be taken when usingthe hazard warning flasher whilethe vehicle is being towed.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

OLD026100

6 3


TIRES PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)

(1) TPMS Malfunction Indicator(2) Low Tire Pressure Telltale

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-vided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehi-cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-ard or tire inflation pressure label. (Ifyour vehicle has tires of a differentsize than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pres-sure label, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure forthose tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pres-sure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a signif-icantly under-inflated tire causes thetire to overheat and can lead to tirefailure. Under-inflation also reducesfuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire mainte-nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pres-sure, even if under-inflation has notreached the level to trigger illumina-tion of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is provided by aseparate telltale, which displays thesymbol "TPMS" when illuminated.When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tire pres-sure as intended. TPMS malfunctionsmay occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replace-ment or alternate tires or wheels onthe vehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltaleafter replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensure thatthe replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

OLD626200N


46

Low tire pressuretelltale

When the tire pressure monitoringsystem warning telltale is illuminat-ed, one or more of your tires is sig-nificantly under-inflated. Immediatelyreduce your speed, avoid hard cor-nering and anticipate increased stop-ping distances. You should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible.Inflate the tires to the proper pres-sure as indicated on the vehicle’splacard or tire inflation pressure labellocated on the driver’s side center pil-lar outer panel. If you cannot reach aservice station or if the tire cannothold the newly added air, replace thelow pressure tire with the temporaryspare tire. Then the TPMS malfunc-tion indicator may turn on and theLow Tire Pressure telltale may turnoff after restarting and about 20 min-utes of continuous driving before youhave the low-pressure tire repairedand replaced on the vehicle.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

WARNING - Low pressuredamage

Significantly low tire pressuremakes the vehicle unstable andcan contribute to loss of vehiclecontrol and increased brakingdistances.Continued driving on low pres-sure tires can cause the tires tooverheat and fail.

CAUTION - Changing tem-peratures

In winter or cold weather, thelow tire pressure telltale may beilluminated if the tire pressurewas adjusted to the recom-mended tire inflation pressurein warm weather. It does notmean your TPMS is malfunction-ing because the decreased tem-perature leads to a proportionallowering of tire pressure.When you drive your vehiclefrom a warm area to a cold areaor from a cold area to a warmarea, or the outside temperatureis greatly higher or lower, youshould check the tire inflationpressure and adjust the tires tothe recommended tire inflationpressure.

6 5


TPMS (Tire pressuremonitoring system)malfunction telltaleThe TPMS malfunction indicator turnson and stays on when there is a prob-lem with the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem. If the system is able to cor-rectly detect an under-inflation warningat the same time as system failure thenit will illuminate both the TPMS mal-function and the low tire pressure tell-tale e. g. if Front Left sensor fails, theTPMS malfunction indicator turns on,but if Front Right, Rear Left, or RearRight tire is under-inflated, the low tirepressure telltale may turn on at thesame time as the TPMS malfunctionindicator.Have the system checked by anauthorized Kia dealer as soon as pos-sible to determine the cause of theproblem.

✽✽ NOTICE• The TPMS malfunction indicator

may be illuminated if the vehicle ismoving around electric power sup-ply cable or radio transmitter suchas near police stations, governmentand public offices, broadcasting sta-tions, military installations, air-ports, or transmitting tower, etc.which can interfere with normaloperation of the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS).

• The TPMS malfunction indicatormay be illuminated if some elec-tronic devices, such as notebookcomputers, are used in the vehicle.This can interfere with normaloperation of the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS).

(Continued)

(Continued)• If there is a failed tire sensor, it is

possible for the TPMS to tem-porarily learn a replacement sen-sor if closely driven to anothervehicle that is also equipped withTPMS. In rare cases, this maytemporarily delay the TPMS mal-function indicator from turningon.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

TPMS


66

Changing a tire with TPMSIf you have a flat tire, the Low TirePressure telltale will turn on. Havethe flat tire repaired by an authorizedKia dealer as soon as possible orreplace the flat tire with the tempo-rary spare tire.

✽✽ NOTICENEVER use a puncture-repairingagent to repair and/or inflate a lowpressure tire. If used, you will haveto replace the tire pressure sensor.

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-ommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by an authorizedKia dealer as soon as possible.

After you replace the low pressuretire with the temporary spare tire, theTPMS malfunction indicator may illu-minate after restarting and about 20minutes of continuous driving.Once the low pressure tire is re-inflat-ed to the recommended pressureand installed on the vehicle, theTPMS malfunction indicator and thelow tire pressure telltale will be soonextinguished. If the low pressure andTPMS malfunction indicators are notextinguished after about 20 minutesof continuous driving, please visit anauthorized Kia dealer.You may not be able to identify a lowtire by simply looking at it. Always usea good quality tire pressure gauge tomeasure the tire's inflation pressure.Please note that a tire that is hot(from being driven) will have a higherpressure measurement than a tirethat is cold (from sitting stationary forat least 3 hours and driven less than1.6 km (1 mile) during that 3 hourperiod). Allow the tire to cool beforemeasuring the inflation pressure.

Always be sure the tire is cold beforeinflating to the recommended pres-sure.A cold tire means the vehicle hasbeen sitting for 3 hours and driven forless than 1.6 km (1 mile) in that 3hour period.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CAUTION• Do not use any tire sealant if

your vehicle is equipped witha Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem.The liquid sealant candamage the tire pressure sen-sors.

• In order for the system to cor-rectly monitor tires for under-inflation, there should be atotal of exactly 4 sensors fit-ted to each of the four drivenwheel positions. There shouldbe no other sensors in thevehicle since this could causethe system to monitor thewrong sensors

6 7


This device complies withIndustry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and 2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to oper-ate the equipment.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

WARNING - ProtectingTPMS

Tampering with, modifying, ordisabling the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)components may interfere withthe system's ability to warn thedriver of low tire pressure con-ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-tions.

WARNING - TPMS• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire dam-age caused by external fac-tors such as nails or roaddebris.

• If you feel any vehicle instabil-ity, immediately take your footoff the accelerator, apply thebrakes gradually and withlight force, and slowly move toa safe position off the road.


86

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

OVERHEATING If your temperature gauge indicatesoverheating, if you experience a lossof power, or if you hear a loud knock-ing or pinging noise, the engine hasprobably overheated. Should any ofthese symptoms occur, use the fol-lowing procedure:1. Turn on the hazard warning flash-

er, then drive to the nearest safelocation and stop your vehicle; setthe automatic transaxle in P(Park), or shift the manualtransaxle to N (Neutral) and applythe parking brake.

2. Make sure the air conditioner isoff.

3. If coolant or steam is boiling out ofthe radiator, stop the engine andcall an Authorized Kia Dealer forassistance.

If coolant is not boiling out, allowthe engine to idle and open thehood to permit the engine to coolgradually.If the temperature does not godown with the engine idling, stopthe engine and allow sufficienttime for it to cool.

4. The coolant level should then bechecked. If the level in the reser-voir is low, look for leaks at theradiator hoses and connections,heater hoses and connections,radiator, and water pump. If youfind a major leak or another prob-lem that may have caused theengine to overheat, do not operatethe engine until it has been cor-rected. Call an Authorized KiaDealer for assistance. If you do notfind a leak or other problem, care-fully add coolant to the reservoir.

If the engine frequently overheats,have the cooling system checkedand repaired by an Authorized KiaDealer.

WARNING - Removingradiator cap

Do not remove the radiator capwhen the engine and radiatorare hot. Scalding hot coolantand steam may blow out underpressure. This could cause seri-ous injury.

6 9


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

EMERGENCY STARTING Jump starting Jump starting can be dangerous ifdone incorrectly. Therefore, to avoidharm to yourself or damage to yourvehicle or battery, follow the jumpstarting procedures listed on page6-10. If in doubt, we strongly recom-mend that you have a competenttechnician or towing service jumpstart your vehicle.

WARNING - Battery• Keep all flames or sparks

away from the battery.The bat-tery produces hydrogen gaswhich may explode if exposedto flame or sparks.

• Do not attempt to jump startthe vehicle if the dischargedbattery is frozen or if the elec-trolyte level is low; the batterymay rupture or explode.

WARNING - BatteryNever attempt to check the elec-trolyte level of the battery asthis may cause the battery torupture or explode causing seri-ous injury.

CAUTIONUse only a 12-volt jumper sys-tem. You can damage a 12-voltstarting motor, ignition system,and other electrical partsbeyond repair by use of a 24-volt power supply (either two12-volt batteries in series or a24-volt motor generator set).


106

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Connecting jumper cables Jump starting procedure 1. Make sure the booster battery is

12-volt and that its negative termi-nal is grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, do not allow the vehiclesto touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary electricalloads.

4. Connect the jumper cables in theexact sequence shown in the previ-ous illustration. First connect oneend of a jumper cable to the posi-tive terminal of the discharged bat-tery (1), then connect the other endto the positive terminal on thebooster battery (2). Proceed to con-nect one end of the other jumpercable to the negative terminal of thebooster battery (3), then the otherend to a solid, stationary, metallicpoint (for example, the engine liftingbracket) away from the battery (4).Do not connect it to or near anypart that moves when the engine iscranked. Do not connect the jumpercable from the negative terminal ofthe booster battery to the negativeterminal of the discharged battery.

Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.

Jumper Cables

Booster battery

OLD046001

Discharged battery

6 11


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Do not allow the jumper cables tocontact anything except the cor-rect battery terminals or the cor-rect ground. Do not lean over thebattery when making connections.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle withthe booster battery and let it run at2,000 rpm, then start the engine ofthe vehicle with the dischargedbattery.

If the cause of your battery discharg-ing is not apparent, you should haveyour vehicle checked by anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

Refer to illustration on page 6-10.

Push-starting Your manual transaxle-equippedvehicle should not be push-startedbecause it might damage the emis-sion control system.Vehicles equipped with automatictransaxle cannot be push-started.Follow the directions in this sectionfor jump-starting.

CAUTIONNever tow a vehicle to start itbecause the sudden surge for-ward when the engine startscould cause a collision with thetow vehicle.


126

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION

Fuses A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-tected from electrical overload dam-age by fuses.

This vehicle has two fuse panels,one located in the driver's side kneebolster, the other in the engine com-partment near the battery.If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-sories, or controls do not work, checkthe appropriate circuit fuse. If a fusehas blown, the element inside thefuse will be melted.If the electrical system does notwork, first check the driver’s sidefuse panel.Always replace a blown fuse withone of the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, thisindicates an electrical problem. Avoidusing the system involved and imme-diately consult an Authorized KiaDealer.Three kinds of fuses are used: bladetype for lower amperage rating, car-tridge type, and fusible link for high-er amperage ratings.

1VQA4037

Normal

Normal

Blade type

Cartridge type

Fusible link

Blown

Blown

Normal Blown

6 13


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Fuse replacement

Driver-side knee bolster1. Turn the ignition switch and all

other switches off.2. Pull the suspected fuse straight

out. Use the removal tool providedon the cover.

3. Check the removed fuse; replace itif it is blown.Spare fuses are provided in thefuse panel in engine compart-ment.

4. Push in a new fuse of the samerating, and make sure it fits tightlyin the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an AuthorizedKia Dealer.

If you do not have a spare, use afuse of the same rating from a circuityou may not need for operating thevehicle, such as the audio fuse.If the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work and thefuses are OK, check the fuse block inthe engine compartment. If a fuse isblown, it must be replaced.

1LDA4003 1LDN4022

WARNING - Fuse replace-ment

• Never replace a fuse with any-thing but another fuse of thesame rating.

• A higher capacity fuse couldcause damage and possibly afire.

• Never install a wire instead ofthe proper fuse - even as atemporary repair. It may causeextensive wiring damage andpossibly a fire.

• Do not use a screwdriver orany other metal object toremove fuses because it maycause a short circuit and dam-age the system.


146

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Engine compartment1. Turn the ignition switch and all

other switches off.2. Remove the fuse box cover by

pressing the taps on both endsand pulling up.

3. Check the removed fuse; replace itif it is blown.

4. Push in a new fuse of the samerating, and make sure it fits tightlyin the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an AuthorizedKia Dealer.

Main fuseIf the ALT (120A) fuse is blown, itmust be removed as follows:1. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.2. Remove the screws shown in the

picture above.3. Replace the fuse with a new one

of the same rating.4. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

1LDA4005 1LDA4006

CAUTIONAfter checking the fuse box inthe engine compartment,securely install the fuse boxcover. If not, electrical failuresmay occur from water leakingin.

6 15


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Fuse/Relay panel descriptionInside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

Engine compartment

2LDN4008/2LDN4007

Driver-side knee bolster


166

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Description Fuse rating Protected componentATM 20A Automatic transaxle controlECU1 10A Engine control unitSTOP 15A Stop lightF/WIPER 20A Front wiperR/FOG 10A Rear fog lightF/FOG 15A Front fog lightLO HDLP 15A Headlight (low)HI HDLP 15A Headlight (high)A/CON 10A Air conditionerF/PUMP 15A Fuel pumpT/OPEN 10A Trunk lid openerFOLD 10A Outside rearview mirror foldingHORN 10A HornDEICE 15A DeicerINJ 15A InjectionSNSR 10A O2 sensorECU2 30A Engine control unitSPARE 10A spare fuseSPARE 15A spare fuseSPARE 20A spare fuseSPARE 30A spare fuseABS2 30A Anti-lock brake systemABS1 30A Anti-lock brake systemIP B+ 50A In panel B+

Description Fuse rating Protected componentBLOWER 30A BlowerIGN2 30A IgnitionIGN1 30A IgnitionRAD 30A Radiator fanCOND 20A Condenser fanALT 120A AlternaterATM - Automatic transaxle control relayWIPER - Wiper relayF/FOG - Front fog light relayLO HDLP - Headlight relay (low) HI HDLP - Headlight relay (high)A/CON - Air conditioner relayF/PUMP - Fuel pumpDRL - Daytime running light relayCOND2 - Condenser fan relayHORN - Horn relayMAIN - Main relaySTART - Start motor relayRAD - Radiator fan relayCOND - Condenser fan relay

Engine compartment

6 17


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Driver-side knee bolsterDescription Fuse rating Protected component

START 10A Start motorSRF/D_LOCK 20A Sunroof, Door lockHAZARD 10A Hazard warning flasherA/CON 10A Air conditionerCLUSTER 10A ClusterRKE 10A Remote keyless entryS/HTR 20A Seat warmerC/LIGHTER 15A Cigar lighterA/BAG 15A Air bagR/WIPER 15A Rear wiperAUDIO 10A AudioABS 10A Anti-lock brake systemACC/PWR 15A Accessory / Power socketROOM 15A Room lampIGN 10A IgnitionECU 10A Engine control unitTAIL RH 10A Tail light (right)T/SIG 10A Turn signal lightRR/HTR 30A Rear window defrosterP/WDW LH 25A Power window (left)HTD/MIRR 10A Outside rearview mirror heater P/WDW RH 25A Power window (right)TAIL LH 10A Tail light (left)

Description Fuse rating Protected componentRR/HTR - Rear window defroster relayRESISTOR - ResistorP/WDW - Power window relayPOWER - Accessory / Power socket relayTAIL - Tail light relay


186

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Memory fuseYour vehicle is equipped with a mem-ory fuse to prevent battery dischargeif your vehicle is parked withoutbeing operated for prolonged peri-ods. Use the following proceduresbefore parking the vehicle for pro-longed period.

1. Turn off the engine.2. Turn off the headlights and tail

lights.3. Open the driver-side knee bolster

cover and pull up the “ROOM15A”.

✽✽ NOTICE• If the memory fuse is pulled up

from the fuse panel, the warningchime, audio, clock and intetriorlamps, etc., will not operate. Someitems must be reset after replace-ment. (Refer to “Items to bereset···.” on page 7-26)

• Even though the memory fuse ispulled up, the battery can still bedischarged by operation of theheadlights or other electricaldevices.

1LDA4004

Memory fuse

6 19


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

TOWING

If emergency towing is necessary,we recommend having it done by anauthorized Kia dealer or a commer-cial tow-truck service. Proper liftingand towing procedures are neces-sary to prevent damage to the vehi-cle. The use of wheel dollies orflatbed is recommended.For trailer towing guidelines informa-tion, refer to section 5 “Driving Tips”.

It is acceptable to tow the vehiclewith the rear wheels on the ground(without dollies) and the front wheelsoff the ground.When being towed by a commercialtow truck and wheel dollies are notused, the front of the vehicle shouldalways be lifted, not the rear.

2GHA4107

1LDN4023

2LDA4001 2LDA4002

CAUTION• Do not tow the vehicle back-

wards with the front wheels onthe ground as this may causedamage to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-typeequipment. Use wheel lift orflatbed equipment.


206

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

When towing your vehicle in anemergency without wheel dollies :1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC

position.2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).3. Release the parking brake.

Tie-down hook (for flatbed towing)

Towing with a vehicle otherthan a tow truck If towing is necessary, we recom-mend you to have it done by anAuthorized Kia dealer or a commer-cial tow truck service.

OLD046019

Tie-down hook

CAUTIONFailure to place the transaxleshift lever in N (Neutral) maycause internal damage to thetransaxle.

WARNING Do not use the hooks under thefront of the vehicle for towingpurposes. These hooks aredesigned ONLY for transport tie-down. If the tie-down hooks areused for towing, the tie-downhooks will be damaged and thiscould lead to serious injury.

OLD046020

• Front

OLD046021

• Rear

6 21


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may betemporarily towed using a cable orchain secured to the emergency tow-ing hook under the front or rear of thevehicle. Use extreme caution whentowing the vehicle. A driver must bein the vehicle to steer it and operatethe brakes.

Towing in this manner may be doneonly on hard-surfaced roads for ashort distance and at low speeds.Also, the wheels, axles, power train,steering and brakes must all be ingood condition.• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a

vehicle out of mud, sand or otherconditions from which the vehiclecannot be driven out under its ownpower.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier thanthe vehicle doing the towing.

• The drivers of both vehicles shouldcommunicate with each other fre-quently. • Before emergency towing, check

that the hook is not broken or dam-aged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chainsecurely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steadyand even force.

• To avoid damaging the hook, donot pull from the side or at a verti-cal angle. Always pull straightahead.

CAUTION• Attach a towing strap to the

tow hook.• Using a portion of the vehicle

other than the tow hooks fortowing may damage the bodyof your vehicle.

• Use only a cable or chainspecifically intended for usein towing vehicles. Securelyfasten the cable or chain tothe towing hook provided.


226

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

• Use a towing strap less than 5 m(16 feet) long. Attach a white or redcloth (about 30 cm (12 inches)wide) in the middle of the strap foreasy visibility.

• Drive carefully so that the towingstrap is not loosened during tow-ing.

When your vehicle is beingtowed by another vehicleother than a tow truck (In caseof an emergency) • Turn the ignition switch to ACC so

the steering wheel isn’t locked.• Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).• Release the parking bake.• Vehicle equipped with automatic

transaxles should not exceed 45km/h (28 mph) and should not betowed more than 80 km (50 miles).

• Vehicle equipped with manualtransmissions should not be towedin excess of 88 km/h (55 mph) andshould not be towed more than645 km (400 miles).

1LDA4024

WARNING Use extreme caution when tow-ing the vehicle.• Avoid sudden starts or erratic

driving maneuvers whichwould place excessive stresson the emergency towinghook and towing cable orchain. The hook and towingcable or chain may break andcause serious injury or dam-age.

• If the towing vehicle can hard-ly move, do not forcibly con-tinue the towing. Contact anAuthorized Kia dealer or acommercial tow truck servicefor assistance.

• Tow the vehicle as straightahead as possible.

6 23


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

• Press the brake pedal with moreforce than normal since you willhave reduced brake performance.

• More steering effort will berequired because the power steer-ing system will be disabled.

• If you are driving down a long hill,the brakes may overheat and brakeperformance will be reduced. Stopoften and let the brakes cool off.

Tips for towing a stuck vehicleThe following methods are effectivewhen your vehicle is stuck in mud,sand or similar substances that pre-vent the vehicle from being drivenout under its own power.• Remove the soil and sand, etc.

from the front and the back of thetires.

• Place a stone or wood under thetires.

CAUTIONTo prevent internal damage tothe transaxle, never tow yourvehicle from the rear (back-wards) with all four tires in con-tact with the surface.


246

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

The spare tire, jack, jack handle,wheel lug nut wrench are stored inthe trunk compartment. Move thecarpeting out of the way to reach thisequipment.

Removing the spare tire Turn the tire hold-down wing boltcounterclockwise.Store the tire in the reverse order ofremoval.To prevent the spare tire and toolsfrom “rattling” while the vehicle is inmotion, store them properly.

Important - use of compactspare tireyour vehicle is equipped with a com-pact spare tire. This compact sparetire takes up less space than a regu-lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than aconventional tire and is designed fortemporary use only.

1LDN4009 1LDA4010

CAUTION - Compactspare

• You should drive carefullywhen the compact spare is inuse. The compact spareshould be replaced by theproper conventional tire andrim at the first opportunity.

• The operation of this vehicleis not recommended withmore than one compact sparetire in use at the same time.

6 25


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The compact spare should be inflat-ed to 420 kPa (60 psi).

✽✽ NOTICECheck the inflation pressure afterinstalling the spare tire. Adjust it tothe specified pressure, as necessary.

When using a compact spare tire,observe the following precautions:• Under no circumstances should

you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); ahigher speed could damage thetire.

• Ensure that you drive slowlyenough for the road conditions toavoid all hazards. Any road hazard,such as a pothole or debris, couldseriously damage the compactspare.

• Any continuous road use of this tirecould result in tire failure, loss ofvehicle control, and possible per-sonal injury.

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-mum load rating or the load-carry-ing capacity shown on the sidewallof the compact spare tire.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. Thecompact spare tire diameter issmaller than the diameter of a con-ventional tire and reduces theground clearance approximately25 mm (1 inch), which could resultin damage to the vehicle.

• Do not take this vehicle through anautomatic car wash.

• This tire should not be installed onthe front axle if the vehicle must bedriven in snow or on ice.

• Do not use the compact spare tireon any other vehicle because thistire has been designed especiallyfor your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire’s tread lifeis shorter than a regular tire.Inspect your compact spare tireregularly and replace worn com-pact spare tires with the same sizeand design, mounted on the samewheel.

CAUTION - Compactspare

This spare tire should be usedonly for VERY short distances.Compact spares should NEVERbe used for long drives orextended distances.


266

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Changing tires Jacking instructions The jack is provided for emergencytire changing only.Follow jacking instructions to reducethe possibility of personal injury.

WARNING - Changingtires

• Never attempt vehicle repairsin the traffic lanes of a publicroad or highway.

• Always move the vehicle com-pletely off the road and ontothe shoulder before trying tochange a tire. The jack shouldbe used on level firm groundwhenever possible. If you can-not find a firm, level place offthe road, call a towing servicecompany for assistance.

• Be sure to use the correctfront and rear jacking posi-tions on the vehicle; never usethe bumpers or any other partof the vehicle for jack support.

(Continued)

(Continued)• The vehicle can easily roll off

the jack causing seriousinjury or death. No personshould place any portion oftheir body under a vehicle thatis supported only by a jack.

• Do not start or run the enginewhile the vehicle is on thejack.

• Do not allow anyone to remainin the vehicle while it is on thejack.

• Make sure any children pres-ent are in a secure place awayfrom the road and from thevehicle to be raised with thejack.

6 27


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Tire replacement 1. Park on a level surface and apply

the parking brake firmly.2. Shift the shift lever into R

(Reverse) with manual transaxleor P (Park) with automatictransaxle.

3. Activate the hazard warning flash-er.

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,jack, jack handle, and spare tirefrom the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of thewheel that is diagonally oppositethe jack position.

WARNING - Changing a tire• To prevent vehicle movement

while changing a tire, alwaysset the parking brake fully, andalways block the wheel diago-nally opposite the wheel beingchanged.

• It is recommended that thewheels of the vehicle bechocked, and that no personshould remain in a vehicle thatis being jacked.

1JBA6021 1JBA6504


286

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-terclockwise one turn each, but donot remove any nut until the tirehas been raised off the ground.

7. Place the jack at the front or rearjacking position closest to the tireyou are changing. Place the jackat the designated locations underthe frame. The jacking positionsare plates welded to the framewith two tabs and a raised dot toindex with the jack.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jackand turn it clockwise, raising thevehicle until the tire just clears theground. This measurement isapproximately 30 mm (1.2 in).Before removing the wheel lugnuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-ble and that there is no chance formovement or slippage.

9. Remove the wheel lug nuts byturning them counterclockwise,then remove the wheel.

10. Mount the spare tire into positionand install the wheel lug nutswith the beveled edge inward.

WARNING - Jack locationTo reduce the possibility ofinjury, be sure to use only thejack provided with the vehicleand in the correct jack position;never use any other part of thevehicle for jack support.

1LDN40161LDA4015OLD046014

6 29


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

11. Once the wheel lug nuts havebeen tightened, lower the vehiclefully to the ground and continue totighten the lug nuts until they arefully secured. Tighten the wheellug nuts firmly in a “X” pattern.If you are unsure of the tightnessof the wheel lug nuts, have themchecked at the nearest servicestation. The specified tighteningtorque is 9~11 kg•m (65-79 lb•ft,88-107 N•m). Improperly tight-ened wheel lug nuts could causebrake pedal vibration while brak-ing.

To prevent the jack, jack handle,wheel lug nut wrench and spare tirefrom rattling while the vehicle is inmotion, store them properly.

CAUTIONYour vehicle has metric threadson the wheel bolts and nuts.Make certain during wheelremoval that the same nutsremoved are reinstalled - or, ifreplaced, that nuts with metricthreads and the same chamferconfiguration are used.Installation of a non-metricthread nut on a metric bolt orvice-versa will not secure thewheel to the hub properly andwill damage the bolt so that itmust be replaced.Note that most lug nuts do nothave metric threads. Be sure touse extreme care in checkingfor thread style before installingaftermarket lug nuts or wheels.If in doubt, consult anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

WARNING - Wheel boltsIf the bolts are damaged or ifnon-metric nut is used on a met-ric bolts or vice versa, they maylose their ability to retain thewheel. This could lead to theloss of the wheel resulting insevere injury or death.

WARNINGCheck the inflation pressures assoon as possible after installingthe spare tire. Adjust it to thespecified pressure, if necessary.Refer to Section 8, Specifications.

OLD046018

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Maintenance services / 7-2Maintenance schedule / 7-3Owner maintenance / 7-7Engine compartment / 7-10Engine oil and oil filter / 7-11Engine cooling system / 7-12Brakes and clutch / 7-15Parking brake / 7-16Power steering / 7-17Manual transaxle / 7-18Automatic transaxle / 7-18Lubricants and fluids / 7-20Air cleaner / 7-21Climate control air filter / 7-22Wiper blades / 7-23

Battery / 7-25Tires and wheels / 7-28Exterior care / 7-40Interior care / 7-44

Maintenance

Maintenance

27

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

MAINTENANCE SERVICESYou should exercise the utmost careto prevent damage to your vehicleand injury to yourself whenever per-forming any maintenance or inspec-tion procedures.Should you have any doubts con-cerning the inspection or servicing ofyour vehicle, we strongly recom-mend that you have an AuthorizedKia Dealer perform this work.An Authorized Kia Dealer has facto-ry-trained technicians and genuineKia parts to service your vehicleproperly. For expert advice and qual-ity service, see an Authorized KiaDealer.Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-cient servicing may result in opera-tional problems with your vehicle thatcould lead to vehicle damage, anaccident, or personal injury.

Owner’s responsibility

✽✽ NOTICEMaintenance Service and RecordRetention are the owner's responsi-bility.

You should retain documents thatshow proper maintenance has beenperformed on your vehicle in accor-dance with the scheduled mainte-nance service charts shown on thefollowing pages. You need this infor-mation to establish your compliancewith the servicing and maintenancerequirements of your Kia warranties.Detailed warranty information is pro-vided in your Warranty & ConsumerInformation manual.

Repairs and adjustments required asa result of improper maintenance ora lack of required maintenance arenot covered.We recommend you have your vehi-cle maintained and repaired by anAuthorized Kia Dealer. An AuthorizedKia Dealer meets Kia`s high servicequality standards and receives tech-nical support from Kia in order to pro-vide you with a high level of servicesatisfaction.

7 3

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Kilometers or time in months, whichever comes first

× 1,000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128

# Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64

Engine oil & engine oil filter (1)

Drive belts (tension) I I I I

Cooling system hoses & connections I I I I I

Engine coolant (1) I I I I I R I I I I I R I I I I

Fuel filter R R

Fuel tank cap, lines, EVAP canister and hoses I I

Fuel tank air filter I R I R I

Air cleaner filter (2) I I I I I R I I I I I R I I I I

Ignition wires I I

Spark plugs Platinum coated R

Iridium coated

Idle speed I I I I I

Valve clearance (if equipped) I

Engine timing belt R

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

MAINTENANCE ITEM

Engine control system

Replace every 6,000 km or 6 months.

Replace every 160,000 km

Maintenance

47

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONTINUED)


× 1,000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128

# Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64

Air conditioner compressor operation & I I I I I

refrigerant amount (if equipped)

Exhaust pipes, heat shield & mountings I I I I I I I I

Front suspension ball joints I I I I

Brakes/clutch fluid (1) I I I I I I I R I I I I I I I R

Front brake pads & discs (3) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Rear brake pads & discs/drums (3) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Parking brake I I I I I I I I

Brake lines & connections I I I I I

(including booster)

Manual transaxle oil (1) I I I R I I I R I I I R I I I R

Clutch & brake pedal free play I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I


MAINTENANCE ITEM

Chassis and body

7 5

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONTINUED)


× 1,000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128

# Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64

Automatic transaxle fluid (1) I I I R I I I R I I I R I I I R

Chassis & underbody bolts & nuts I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Tire condition & inflation pressure I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Wheel alignment (4)

Tire rotation

Steering operation & linkage I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Power steering fluid & lines I I I I I I I I

Driveshaft dust boots I I I I I

Seat belts, buckles & anchors I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Lock, hinges & hood latch L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L


MAINTENANCE ITEM

Inspect when abnormal condition noted

Rotate the tires every 12,000 km

Chassis and body (Continued)

Maintenance

67

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Chart symbols:I- Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, refill, adjust or replace.R- Replace or change.L- Lubricate.

(1) Refer to the lubricant and coolant specifications in the Owner’s Manual.(2) More frequent maintenance is required if driving under dusty conditions.(3) More frequent maintenance is required if the vehicle is operated under any of the following conditions:

a. Short-distance driving.b. Driving on dusty roads.c. Extensive idling or slow-speed driving in stop-and-go traffic.

(4) If necessary, rotate and balance the wheels.

* Note: Check the engine oil and coolant levels every week.

7 7

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

OWNER MAINTENANCE Owner maintenance schedule The following lists are vehicle checksand inspections that should be per-formed by the owner or anAuthorized Kia Dealer at the fre-quencies indicated to help ensuresafe, dependable operation of yourvehicle.Any adverse conditions should bebrought to the attention of your deal-er as soon as possible.These Owner Maintenance Checksare generally not covered by war-ranties and you may be charged forlabor, parts and lubricants used.

When you stop for fuel:• Check the engine oil level.• Check coolant level in coolant

reservoir.

• Check the windshield washer fluidlevel.

• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

While operating your vehicle:• Note any changes in the sound of

the exhaust or any smell ofexhaust fumes in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steeringwheel. Notice any increased steer-ing effort or looseness in the steer-ing wheel, or change in its straight-ahead position.

• Notice if your vehicle constantlyturns slightly or “pulls” to one sidewhen traveling on smooth, levelroad.

• When stopping, listen and checkfor strange sounds, pulling to oneside, increased brake pedal travelor “hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in theoperation of your transaxle occurs,check the transaxle fluid level.

• Check automatic transaxle P(Park) function.

• Check parking brake.• Check for fluid leaks under your

vehicle (water dripping from the airconditioning system after use isnormal).

WARNING - Radiationcoolant

Be careful when checking yourengine coolant level when theengine is hot. Scalding hotcoolant and steam may blow outunder pressure. This couldcause serious injury.

Maintenance

87

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

At least monthly:• Check coolant level in the engine

coolant reservoir.• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turnsignals and hazard warning flash-ers.

• Check the inflation pressures of alltires including the spare.

At least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall) :• Check radiator, heater and air con-

ditioning hoses for leaks or da-mage.

• Check windshield washer sprayand wiper operation. Clean wiperblades with clean cloth dampenedwith washer fluid.

• Check headlight alignment.• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,

shields and clamps.• Check the lap/shoulder belts for

wear and function.• Check for worn tires and loose

wheel lug nuts.

At least once a year :• Clean body and door drain holes.• Lubricate door hinges and checks,

and hood hinges.• Lubricate door and hood locks and

latches.• Lubricate door rubber weather-

strips.• Check the air conditioning system.• Check the power steering fluid

level.• Inspect and lubricate automatic

transaxle linkage and controls.• Clean battery and terminals.• Check the brake fluid level.

7 9

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Owner maintenance precau-tions Improper or incomplete service mayresult in problems. This section givesinstructions only for the maintenanceitems that are easy to perform.As explained earlier in this section,several procedures can be done onlyby an Authorized Kia Dealer withspecial tools.

✽✽ NOTICEImproper owner maintenance dur-ing the warranty period may affectwarranty coverage. For details, readthe separate Kia Warranty &Consumer Information Manual pro-vided with the vehicle. If you'reunsure about any servicing or main-tenance procedure, have it done byan Authorized Kia Dealer.

WARNING - Maintenancework

• Performing maintenance workon a vehicle can be danger-ous. You can be seriouslyinjured while performing somemaintenance procedures. Ifyou lack sufficient knowledgeand experience or the propertools and equipment to do thework, have it done by anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

• Working under the hood withthe engine running is danger-ous. It becomes even moredangerous when you wearjewelry or loose clothing.These can become entangledin moving parts and result ininjury. Therefore, if you mustrun the engine while workingunder the hood, make certainthat you remove all jewelry(especially rings, bracelets,watches, and necklaces) andall neckties, scarves, and sim-ilar loose clothing before get-ting near the engine or cool-ing fans.

Maintenance

107

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OLD056002

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box

6. Negative battery terminal

7. Positive battery terminal

8. Auto transaxle oil dipstick (if equipped)

9. Radiator cap

10. Engine oil dipstick

11. Engine coolant reservoir

12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

7 11

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

Checking the engine oil level 1. Be sure the vehicle is on level

ground.2. Start the engine and allow it to

reach normal operating tempera-ture.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for afew minutes (about 5 minutes) forthe oil to return to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,and re-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again andcheck the level. The level shouldbe between F and L.

If it is near or at L, add enough oil tobring the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use only the specified engine oil.(Refer to “Recommended Lubricants”in section 8.)

Changing the engine oil andfilterHave engine oil and filter changed byan authorized Kia dealer accordingto the Maintenance Schedule at thebeginning of this section.

1LDN5003OHD076004R

WARNINGUsed engine oil may cause irri-tation or cancer of the skin if leftin contact with the skin for pro-longed periods of time. Usedengine oil contains chemicalsthat have caused cancer in lab-oratory animals. Always protectyour skin by washing yourhands thoroughly with soap andwarm water as soon as possibleafter handling used oil.

Maintenance

127

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The high-pressure cooling systemhas a reservoir filled with year-roundantifreeze coolant. The reservoir isfilled at the factory.Check the antifreeze protection andcoolant level at least once a year, atthe beginning of the winter season,and before traveling to a colder cli-mate.

Checking the coolant level

WARNING - Removingradiator cap

• Never attempt to remove theradiator cap while the engineis operating or hot. Doing somight lead to cooling systemand engine damage and couldresult in serious personalinjury from escaping hotcoolant or steam.

• Turn the engine off and waituntil it cools down. Even then,use extreme care whenremoving the radiator cap.Wrap a thick towel around it,and turn it counterclockwiseslowly to the first stop. Stepback while the pressure isreleased from the cooling sys-tem. When you are sure all thepressure has been released,press down on the cap, usinga thick towel, and continueturning counterclockwise toremove it.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Even if the engine is not oper-

ating, do not remove the radi-ator cap or the drain plugwhile the engine and radiatorare hot. Hot coolant and steammay still blow out under pres-sure, causing serious injury.

7 13

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Check the condition and connectionsof all cooling system hoses andheater hoses. Replace any swollenor deteriorated hoses.The coolant level should be filledbetween F and L marks on the sideof the coolant reservoir when theengine is cool.If the coolant level is low, add enoughspecified coolant to provide protec-tion against freezing and corrosion.Bring the level to F, but do not over-fill. If frequent additions are required,see an Authorized Kia Dealer for acooling system inspection.

Recommended engine coolant • Use only soft (de-mineralized)

water in the coolant mixture.• The engine in your vehicle has alu-

minum engine parts and must beprotected by an ethylene-glycol-based coolant to prevent corrosionand freezing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanolcoolant or mix them with the spec-ified coolant.

• Do not use a solution that containsmore than 60% antifreeze or lessthan 35% antifreeze, which wouldreduce the effectiveness of thesolution.

For mixture percentage, refer to thefollowing table.

OLD056008

Full

OK

Low

-15°C (5°F) 35 65

-25°C (-13°F) 40 60

-35°C (-31°F) 50 50

-45°C (-49°F) 60 40

AmbientTemperature

Mixture Percentage (volume)

CoolantSolution

Water

Maintenance

147

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Changing the coolantHave coolant changed by an author-ized Kia dealer according to theMaintenance Schedule at the begin-ning of this section.

OLD057007N

WARNINGDo not remove the radiator capwhen the engine and radiatorare hot. Scalding hot coolantand steam may blow out underpressure. This could cause seri-ous injury.

CAUTIONPut a thick cloth or fabricaround the radiator cap beforerefilling the coolant in order toprevent the coolant from over-flowing into engine parts suchas generator.

7 15

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

BRAKES AND CLUTCH (IF EQUIPPED)

Checking brake/clutch fluidlevel Check the fluid level in the reservoirperiodically. The fluid level should bebetween MAX and MIN marks on theside of the reservoir.Before removing the reservoir capand adding brake/clutch fluid, cleanthe area around the reservoir capthoroughly to prevent brake/clutchfluid contamination.

If the level is low, add fluid to theMAX level. The level will fall withaccumulated mileage. This is a nor-mal condition associated with thewear of the brake linings. If the fluidlevel is excessively low, have thebrake system checked by anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

Use only the specified brake/clutchfluid. (Refer to “RecommendedLubricants” in section 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

WARNINGWhen changing and addingbrake/clutch fluid, handle itcarefully. Do not let it come incontact with your eyes. Ifbrake/clutch fluid should comein contact with your eyes, imme-diately flush them with a largequantity of fresh tap water. Haveyour eyes examined by a doctoras soon as possible.

WARNINGIn the event the brake systemrequires frequent additions offluid, the vehicle should beinspected by an Authorized KiaDealer.

1LDA5020

Maintenance

167

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Checking the parking brake Check the stroke of the parkingbrake by counting the number of“clicks’’ heard while fully applying itfrom the released position. Also, theparking brake alone should securelyhold the vehicle on a fairly steepgrade. If the stroke is more or lessthan specified, have the parkingbrake adjusted by an Authorized KiaDealer.

Stroke : 7~8 “clicks’’ at a force of 20 kg(44 lbs, 196 N).

CAUTIONDo not allow brake/clutch fluidto contact the vehicle's bodypaint, as paint damage willresult. Brake/clutch fluid, whichhas been exposed to open airfor an extended time shouldnever be used as its quality can-not be guaranteed. It should bethrown out. Don't put in thewrong kind of fluid. For exam-ple, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, inyour brake clutch system candamage brake clutch systemparts.

OLD036030

PARKING BRAKE

7 17

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

POWER STEERING

Checking the power steeringfluid level With the vehicle on level ground,check the fluid level in the powersteering reservoir periodically. Thefluid should be between MAX andMIN marks on the side of the reser-voir at the normal temperature.Before adding power steering fluid,thoroughly clean the area around thereservoir cap to prevent power steer-ing fluid contamination.If the level is low, add fluid to theMAX level.

In the event the power steering sys-tem requires frequent addition offluid, the vehicle should be inspectedby an Authorized Kia Dealer.

Use only the specified power steer-ing fluid. (Refer to "RecommendedLubricants" in section 8.)

Power steering hoseCheck the connections for oil leaks,severe damage and the twists in thepower steering hose before driving.

1LDA5018

CAUTION• To avoid damage to the power

steering pump, do not operatethe vehicle for prolonged peri-ods with a low power steeringfluid level.

• Never start the engine whenthe reservoir tank is empty.

• When adding fluid, be carefulthat dirt does not get into thetank.

• Too little fluid can make thesteering wheel heavier orstrange noise can be generat-ed.

• The use of the non-specifiedfluid could reduce the effec-tiveness of the power steeringwheel and cause damage to it.

Maintenance

187

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Changing the manualtransaxle fluidHave manual transaxle fluid checkedand changed by an authorized Kiadealer according to the MaintenanceSchedule at the beginning of thissection.

Checking the automatictransaxle fluid level The automatic transaxle fluid levelshould be checked regularly.Keep the vehicle on the level groundwith the parking brake applied andcheck the fluid level according to thefollowing procedure.1. Place the selector lever in N

(Neutral) position and confirm theengine is running at normal idlespeed.

2. After the transaxle is warmed upsufficiently (fluid temperature70~80 °C (158~176 °F)), for exam-ple by 10 minutes usual driving,shift the selector lever through allpositions then place the selectorlever in N (Neutral) or P (Park)position.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE(IF EQUIPPED)

1LDA5008

7 19

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

3. Confirm that the fluid level is in“HOT” range on the level gauge. Ifthe fluid level is lower, add thespecified fluid from the fill hole. Ifthe fluid level is higher, drain thefluid from the drain hole.

4. If the fluid level is checked in coldcondition (fluid temperature 20~30 °C (68~86 °F) add the fluid to“COLD (C)” line and then recheckthe fluid level according to theabove step 2.

✽✽ NOTICE“COLD (C)” scale is for referenceonly and should NOT be used todetermine transaxle fluid level.

✽✽ NOTICENew automatic transaxle fluidshould be red. The red dye is addedso the assembly plant can identify itas automatic transaxle fluid and dis-tinguish it from engine oil orantifreeze. The red dye, which is notan indicator of fluid quality, is notpermanent. As the vehicle is driven,the automatic transaxle fluid willbegin to look darker. The color mayeventually appear light brown.Therefore, have an Authorized Kiadealer change the automatictransaxle fluid according to theScheduled Maintenance at thebeginning of this section.

Changing the automatictransaxle fluidHave automatic transaxle fluidchanged by an authorized Kia dealeraccording to the MaintenanceSchedule at the beginning of thissection.

CAUTION• Low fluid level causes

transaxle slippage. Overfillingcan cause foaming, loss of fluidand transaxle malfunction.

• The use of a non-specified fluidcould result in transaxle mal-function and failure.

WARNING - Parking brakeTo avoid sudden movement ofthe vehicle, apply parking brakeand depress the brake pedalbefore moving the shift lever.

OHD076045N

WARNING - Transaxlefluid

The transaxle fluid level shouldbe checked when the engine is atnormal operating temperature.This means that the engine, radi-ator, radiator hose and exhaustsystem etc., are very hot.Exercise great care not to burnyourself during this procedure.

Maintenance

207

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS

Checking the washer fluidlevel The reservoir is translucent so thatyou can check the level with a quickvisual inspection.Check the fluid level in the washerfluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-sary. Plain water may be used ifwasher fluid is not available.However, use washer solvent withantifreeze characteristics in cold cli-mates to prevent freezing.

Body lubrication All moving points of the body, suchas door hinges, hood hinges, andlocks, should be lubricated each timethe engine oil is changed. Use a non-freezing lubricant on locks duringcold weather.Make sure the engine hood second-ary latch keeps the hood from open-ing when the primary latch isreleased.

1LDA5021

WARNING• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluidreservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severelyobscure visibility whensprayed on the windshieldand may cause loss of vehiclecontrol or damage to paintand body trim.

• Windshield washer fluidagents contain some amountsof alcohol and can be flamma-ble under certain circum-stances. Do not allow sparksor flame to contact the washerfluid or the washer fluid reser-voir. Damage to the vehicle orit's occupants could occur.

• Windshield washer fluid ispoisonous to humans and ani-mals. Do not drink and avoidcontacting windshield washerfluid. Serious injury or deathcould occur.

7 21

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

AIR CLEANER

Element cleaningThis element may be air cleaned orreplaced, depending on its condition.Unless it is very dirty, merely shake itto remove foreign particles. Eachtime this filter is inspected, wipe theinside of the air cleaner housing andcover with a damp cloth. If the vehi-cle is operated in extremely dusty orsandy areas, clean or replace thiselement more often than at the usualrecommended intervals.

1LDA5010

CAUTION• Do not drive with the air clean-

er removed; this will result inexcessive engine wear.

• Driving without an air cleanerencourages backfiring, whichcould cause a fire in theengine compartment.

Maintenance

227

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)

The climate control air filter installedbehind the glove box filters the dustor other pollutants that come into thevehicle from the outside through theheating and air conditioning system.If dust or other pollutants accumulatein the filter over a period of time, theair flow from the air vents maydecrease, resulting in moisture accu-mulation on the inside of the wind-shield even when the outside (fresh)are position is selected. If this hap-pens, have the climate control air fil-ter replaced by an Authorized KiaDealer.

The climate control air filter shouldbe replaced every 15,000 km. If thevehicle is operated in the severelyair-polluted cities or on dusty roughroads for a long periods, it should beinspected more frequently andreplaced earlier.

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculatedair

Climate controlair filter

Blower

Evaporatorcore

Heater core

7 23

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

WIPER BLADES

Wiper blade maintenance ✽✽ NOTICECommercial hot waxes applied byautomatic car washes have beenknown to make the windshield diffi-cult to clean.

Contamination of either the wind-shield or the wiper blades with for-eign matter can reduce the effective-ness of the windshield wipers.Common sources of contaminationare insects, tree sap, and hot waxtreatments used by some commer-cial car washes. If the blades are notwiping properly, clean both the win-dow and the blades with a goodcleaner or mild detergent, and rinsethoroughly with clean water.

Windshield wiper bladereplacement When the wipers no longer cleanadequately, the blades may be wornor cracked, and require replacement.

1LDA5022

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the wiperblades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents on or near them.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the wiperarms or other components, donot attempt to move the wipersmanually.

CAUTIONThe use of a non-specifiedwiper blade could result inwiper malfunction and failure.

Maintenance

247

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn thewiper blade assembly to exposethe plastic locking clip.

2. Compress the clip and slide theblade assembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.4. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

1LDA5023 1LDA5024 1LDA5025

CAUTIONDo not allow the wiper arm tofall against the windshield.

7 25

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

BATTERY

WARNING - Battery dangers

Always read the follow-ing instructions carefullywhen handling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettesand all other flames orsparks away from thebattery.

Hydrogen, which is ahighly combustible gas,is always present in bat-tery cells and mayexplode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of thereach of childrenbecause batteries con-tain highly corrosiveSULFURIC ACID. Do notallow battery acid to con-tact your skin, eyes,clothing or paint finish.

(Continued)

(Continued)

If any electrolyte getsinto your eyes, flush youreyes with clean water forat least 15 minutes andget immediate medicalattention. If possible,continue to apply waterwith a sponge or clothuntil medical attention isreceived.If electrolyte gets onyour skin, thoroughlywash the contacted area.If you feel a pain or aburning sensation, getmedical attention imme-diately.

Wear eye protectionwhen charging or work-ing near a battery.Always provide ventila-tion when working in anenclosed space.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When lifting a plastic-cased

battery, excessive pressure onthe case may cause batteryacid to leak, resulting in person-al injury. Lift with a battery car-rier or with your hands onopposite corners.

• Never attempt to charge thebattery when the battery cablesare connected.

• The electrical ignition systemworks with high voltage. Nevertouch these components withthe engine running or the igni-tion switched on.

Maintenance

267

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

For best battery service :• Keep the battery securely mount-

ed.• Keep the battery top clean and dry.• Keep the terminals and connec-

tions clean, tight, and coated withpetroleum jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte fromthe battery immediately with asolution of water and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to beused for an extended time, discon-nect the battery cables.

Battery recharging Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,calcium-based battery.• If the battery becomes discharged

in a short time (because, for exam-ple, the headlights or interior lightswere left on while the vehicle wasnot in use), recharge it by slowcharging (trickle) for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually dischargesbecause of high electric load whilethe vehicle is being used, rechargeit at 20-30A for two hours.

Items to be reset after the batteryhas been discharged or the bat-tery has been disconnected.• Clock (See section 3)• Climate control system

(See section 4)• Audio (See section 3)• Sunroof (See section 3)

1LDE5028

7 27

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

WARNING - Rechargingbattery

When recharging the battery,observe the following precau-tions:• The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed inan area with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes,sparks, or flame near the bat-tery.

• Watch the battery duringcharging, and stop or reducethe charging rate if the batterycells begin gassing (boiling)violently or if the temperatureof the electrolyte of any cellexceeds 49 °C (120 °F).

• Wear eye protection whenchecking the battery duringcharging.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Disconnect the battery charg-

er in the following order.1. Turn off the battery charger

main switch.2. Unhook the negative clamp

from the negative battery ter-minal.

3. Unhook the positive clampfrom the positive battery ter-minal.

CAUTION• Before performing mainte-

nance or recharging the bat-tery, turn off all accessoriesand stop the engine.

• The negative battery cablemust be removed first andinstalled last when the batteryis disconnected.

Maintenance

287

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

TIRES AND WHEELS Tire care For proper maintenance, safety, andmaximum fuel economy, you mustalways maintain recommended tireinflation pressures and stay withinthe load limits and weight distributionrecommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire infla-tion pressures All tire pressures (including thespare) should be checked every daywhen the tires are cold. “Cold Tires”means the vehicle has not been driv-en for at least three hours or drivenless than 1.6 km (one mile).Recommended pressures must bemaintained for the best ride, top vehi-cle handling, and minimum tire wear.

All specifications (sizes and pres-sures) can be found on a labelattached to the vehicle.

1LDN6001

WARNING - Tire underin-flation

Severe underinflation (70 kPa(10 psi) or more) can lead tosevere heat build-up, causingblowouts, tread separation andother tire failures that can resultin the loss of vehicle controlleading to severe injury ordeath. This risk is much higheron hot days and when drivingfor protracted periods at highspeeds.

CAUTION• Underinflation also results in

excessive wear, poor handlingand reduced fuel economy.Wheel deformation also ispossible. Keep your tire pres-sures at the proper levels. If atire frequently needs refilling,have it checked by anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

• Overinflation produces aharsh ride, excessive wear atthe center of the tire tread, anda greater possibility of dam-age from road hazards.

7 29

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Checking tire inflation pres-sureCheck your tires once a month ormore.Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

How to checkUse a good quality gage to check tirepressure.You can not tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by look-ing at them. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they'reunderinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold. - "Cold"means your vehicle has been sittingfor at least three hours or driven nomore than 1.6 km (1 mile).Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gage firm-ly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflationpressure matches the recommendedpressure on the tire and loadinginformation label, no further adjust-ment is necessary. If the pressure islow, add air until you reach the rec-ommended amount.

WARNING - Tire InflationOverinflation or underinflationcan reduce tire life, adverselyaffect vehicle handling, and leadto sudden tire failure.This couldresult in loss of vehicle controland potential injury.

CAUTION - Tire pressureAlways observe the following:• Check tire pressure when the

tires are cold. (After vehiclehas been parked for at leastthree hours or hasn't beendriven more than 1.6 km (onemile) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of yourspare tire each time you checkthe pressure of other tires.

• Never overload your vehicle.Be careful not to overload avehicle luggage rack if yourvehicle is equipped with one.

• Worn, old tires can cause acci-dents. If your tread is badlyworn, or if your tires havebeen damaged, replace them.

CAUTION• Warm tires normally exceed

recommended cold tire pres-sures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6psi). Do not release air fromwarm tires to adjust the pres-sure or the tires will be under-inflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tireinflation valve caps. Withoutthe valve cap, dirt or moisturecould get into the valve coreand cause air leakage. If avalve cap is missing, install anew one as soon as possible.

Maintenance

307

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in the cen-ter of the tire valve. Recheck the tirepressure with the tire gage. Be sureto put the valve caps back on thevalve stems. They help prevent leaksby keeping out dirt and moisture.

Tire rotation To equalize tread wear, it is recom-mended that the tires be rotatedevery 12,000 km (7,500 miles) orsooner if irregular wear develops.During rotation, check the tires forcorrect balance.When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance wheels, severe braking orsevere cornering. Look for bumps orbulges in the tread or side of tire.Replace the tire if you find either ofthese conditions. Replace the tire iffabric or cord is visible. After rotation,be sure to bring the front and rear tirepressures to specification and checklug nut tightness.Refer to Section 8, Specifications.

Disc brake pads should be inspectedfor wear whenever tires are rotated.Rotate radial tires that have anasymmetric tread pattern onlyfrom front to rear and not fromright to left.

CBGQ0707

CBGQ0707A

Do not include compact spare tire in rotation.

Directional tires (if equipped)

WARNING• Do not use the temporary

spare tire for tire rotation.• Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tires under any circum-stances. This may causeunusual handling characteris-tics that could result in death,severe injury, or propertydamage.

7 31

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Tire replacementIf the tire is worn evenly, a tread wearindicator will appear as a solid bandacross the tread. This shows there isless than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of treadleft on the tire. Replace the tire whenthis happens.Do not wait for the band to appearacross the entire tread before replac-ing the tire.

1LDA5026

Tread wear indicator WARNING - Replacingtires

• Driving on worn-out tires isvery hazardous and willreduce braking effectiveness,steering accuracy, and trac-tion.

• Your vehicle is equipped withtires designed to provide forsafe ride and handling capa-bility. Do not use a size andtype of tire and wheel that isdifferent from the one that isoriginally installed on yourvehicle. It can affect the safetyand performance of your vehi-cle, which could lead to han-dling failure or rollover andserious injury. When replacingthe tires, be sure to equip allfour tires with the tire andwheel of the same size, type,tread, brand and load-carryingcapacity.

(Continued)

(Continued)• The use of any other tire size

or type may seriously affectride, handling, ground clear-ance, stopping distance, bodyto tire clearance, snow tireclearance, and speedometerreliability.

• It is best to replace all fourtires at the same time. If that isnot possible, or necessary,then replace the two front ortwo rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling.

Maintenance

327

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Compact spare tire replace-ment (if equipped)A compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular size tire.Replace it when you can see thetread wear indicator bars on the tire.The replacement compact spare tireshould be the same size and designtire as the one provided with yournew Kia and should be mounted onthe same compact spare tire wheel.The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularsize wheel, and the compact sparetire wheel is not designed for mount-ing a regular size tire.

Wheel alignment and tire balance The wheels on your vehicle werealigned and balanced carefully at thefactory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.In most cases, you will not need tohave your wheels aligned again.However, if you notice unusual tirewear or your vehicle pulling one wayor the other, the alignment may needto be reset.If you notice your vehicle vibratingwhen driving on a smooth road, yourwheels may need to be rebalanced.

Wheel replacement When replacing the metal wheels forany reason, make sure the newwheels are equivalent to the originalfactory units in diameter, rim widthand offset.

WARNINGA wheel that is not the correctsize may adversely affect wheeland bearing life, braking andstopping abilities, handling char-acteristics, ground clearance,body-to-tire clearance, snowchain clearance, speedometercalibration, headlight aim andbumper height.CAUTION

Improper wheel weights candamage your vehicle's alu-minum wheels. Use onlyapproved wheel weights.

7 33

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Tire maintenance In addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decreasetire wear. If you find a tire is wornunevenly, have your dealer check thewheel alignement.When you have new tires installed,make sure they are balanced. Thiswill increase vehicle ride comfort andtire life. Additionally, a tire shouldalways be rebalanced if it is removedfrom the wheel.

Tire tractionTire traction can be reduced if youdrive on worn tires, tires that areimproperly inflated or on slipperyroad surfaces. Tires should bereplaced when tread wear indicatorsappear. To reduce the possiblity oflosing control, slow down wheneverthere is rain, snow or ice on the road.

Tire sidewall labelingThis information identifies anddescribes the fundamental charac-teristics of the tire and also providesthe tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. TheTIN can be used to identify the tire incase of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand nameManufacturer or Brand name isshown.

2. Tire size designation A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tiresize designation. You will need thisinformation when selecting replace-ment tires for your car. The followingexplains what the letters and num-bers in the tire size designationmean.Example tire size designation:(These numbers are provided as anexample only; your tire size designa-tor could vary depending on yourvehicle.)P195/60R15 87H

P - Applicable vehicle type (tiresmarked with the prefix “P’’ areintended for use on passengercars or light trucks; however, notall tires have this marking).

195 - Tire width in millimeters.60 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section

height as a percentage of itswidth.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).15 - Rim diameter in inches.

I030B04JM

1

1

23

4

5,6

7

Maintenance

347

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

87 - Load Index, a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See thespeed rating chart in this sectionfor additional information.

Wheel size designation Wheels are also marked with impor-tant information that you need if youever have to replace one. The follow-ing explains what the letters andnumbers in the wheel size designa-tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:6.0JX15

6.0 - Rim width in inches.J - Rim contour designation.15 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tire speed ratings The chart below lists many of the dif-ferent speed ratings currently beingused for passenger cars. The speedrating is part of the tire size designa-tion on the sidewall of the tire. Thissymbol corresponds to that tire'sdesigned maximum safe operatingspeed.

3. Checking tire life (TIN : TireIdentification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years, basedon the manufacturing date, tirestrength and performance, declinewith age naturally (even unusedspare tires). Therefore, the tires(including the spare tire) should bereplaced by new ones. You can findthe manufacturing date on the tiresidewall (possibly on the inside of thewheel), displaying the DOT Code.The DOT Code is a series of num-bers on a tire consisting of numbersand English letters. The manufactur-ing date is designated by the last fourdigits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOOThe front part of the DOT means aplant code number, tire size andtread pattern and the last four num-bers indicate week and year manu-factured.For example:DOT XXXX XXXX 1606 representsthat the tire was produced in the 16thweek of 2006.

S 180 km/h (112 mph)T 190 km/h (118 mph)H 210 km/h (130 mph)V 240 km/h (149 mph)Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)

Maximum SpeedSpeedRatingSymbol

7 35

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

4. Tire ply composition and mate-rial

The number of layers or plies of rub-ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicate thematerials in the tire, which includesteel, nylon, polyester, and others.The letter "R" means radial ply con-struction; the letter "D" means diago-nal or bias ply construction; and theletter "B" means belted-bias ply con-struction.

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressure

This number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflationpressure.

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading The following information relates tothe tire grading system developed bythe Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard (CMVSS) for grading tiresby tread wear, traction and tempera-ture performance.

Tread wearThe tread wear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified govern-ment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditionsof their use. However, performancemay differ from the norm because ofvariations in driving habits, servicepractices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.These grades are molded on theside-walls of passenger vehicle tires.The tires available as standard oroptional equipment on your vehiclesmay vary with respect to grade.

WARNINGTires degrade over time, evenwhen they are not being used.Regardless of the remainingtread, it is recommended thattires generally be replaced aftersix (6) years of normal service.Heat caused by hot climates orfrequent high loading conditionscan accelerate the agingprocess. Failure to follow thiswarning can result in sudden tirefailure, which could lead to aloss of control and an accidentinvolving serious injury or death.

Maintenance

367

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Traction - AA, A, B & C The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B and C. Thegrades represent the tires ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on spec-ified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire markedC may have poor traction perform-ance.Temperature -A, B & C The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B and C. The grades repre-sent the tire’s resistance to the gen-eration of heat and its ability to dissi-pate heat when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specifiedindoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tires todegenerate and reduce tires life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tires failure. Grades A and Brepresent higher levels of perform-ance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by the law.

Tire terminology and defini-tionsAir Pressure: The amount of airinside the tire pressing outward onthe tire. Air pressure is expressed inpounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-pascal (kPa).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional acces-sories. Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatic transmis-sion, power seats, and air condition-ing.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cordsthat is located between the plies andthe tread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcing materials.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords thathold the tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the plies are laid at alternateangles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

WARNING - Tire temperature

The temperature grade for thistire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuild-up and possible suddentire failure. This can cause lossof vehicle control and seriousinjury or death.

7 37

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount ofair pressure in a tire, measured inpounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-pascals (kPa) before a tire has builtup heat from driving.Curb Weight: This means the weightof a motor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant, but without passengers andcargo.DOT Markings: The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumeric des-ignator which can also identify thetire manufacturer, production plant,brand and date of production.GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire, thatmust always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Load Index: An assigned numberranging from 1 to 279 that corre-sponds to the load carrying capacityof a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which acold tire may be inflated. The maxi-mum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.Maximum Load Rating: The loadrating for a tire at the maximum per-missible inflation pressure for thattire.Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessoryweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicle isdesigned to seat multiplied by 68 kg(150 pounds).

Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The sideof a asymmetrical tire that has a par-ticular side that faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. The outwardfacing sidewall bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same moldings onthe inner facing sidewall.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tireused on passenger cars and somelight duty trucks and multipurposevehicles.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-ed tire inflation pressure and shownon the tire placard.Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.Rim: A metal support for a tire andupon which the tire beads are seat-ed.Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Maintenance

387

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Speed Rating: An alphanumericcode assigned to a tire indicating themaximum speed at which a tire canoperate.Traction: The friction between thetire and the road surface. Theamount of grip provided.Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called "wearbars," that show across the tread of atire when only 2/32 inch of treadremains.UTQGS: Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards, a tire informationsystem that provides consumers withratings for a tire's traction, tempera-ture and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturersusing government testing proce-dures. The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire.Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-ber of designated seating positionsmultiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs.) plus therated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tire due tocurb and accessory weight plusmaximum occupant and cargoweight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:That load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to eachaxle its share of the curb weight,accessory weight, and normal occu-pant weight and driving by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-ly attached to a vehicle showing theoriginal equipment tire size and rec-ommended inflation pressure.

All season tires Kia specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good per-formance for use all year round,including snowy and icy road condi-tions. All season tires are identifiedby ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mudand Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snowtires have better snow traction thanall season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

7 39

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Summer tires Kia specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior perform-ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-formance is substantially reduced insnow and ice. Summer tires do nothave the tire traction rating M+S(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.if you plan to operate your vehicle insnowy or icy conditions. Kia recom-mends the use of snow tires or allseason tires on all four wheels.

Snow tiresIf you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size andhave the same load capacity as theoriginal tires. Snow tires should beinstalled on all four wheels; other-wise, poor handling may result.Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4psi) more air pressure than the pres-sure recommended for the standardtires on the tire label on the driver'sside of the center pillar, or up to themaximum pressure shown on the tiresidewall, whichever is less.Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75mph) when your car is equipped withsnow tires.

Maintenance

407

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

EXTERIOR CARE Exterior general caution It is very important to follow the labeldirections when using any chemicalcleaner or polish. Read all warningand caution statements that appearon the label.

Finish maintenanceWashing To help protect your vehicle’s finishfrom rust and deterioration, wash itthoroughly and frequently at leastonce a month with lukewarm or coldwater.If you use your vehicle for off-roaddriving, you should wash it after eachoff-road trip. Pay special attention tothe removal of any accumulation ofsalt, dirt, mud, and other foreignmaterials. Make sure the drain holesin the lower edges of the doors androcker panels are kept clear andclean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,industrial pollution and similardeposits can damage your vehicle’sfinish if not removed immediately.Even prompt washing with plainwater may not completely remove allthese deposits. A mild soap, safe foruse on painted surfaces, may beused.After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-oughly with lukewarm or cold water.Do not allow soap to dry on the fin-ish.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not use strong soap, chemicaldetergents or hot water, and do notwash the vehicle in direct sunlight orwhen the body of the vehicle iswarm.

CAUTION• Water washing in the engine

compartment including highpressure water washing maycause the failure of electricalcircuits located in the enginecompartment.

• Never allow water or other liq-uids to come in contact withelectrical/electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle asthis may damage them andcause a short which can leadto a fire.

OJB037800

7 41

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

WaxingWax the vehicle when water will nolonger bead on the paint.Always wash and dry the vehiclebefore waxing. Use a good qualityliquid or paste wax, and follow themanufacturer’s instructions. Wax allmetal trim to protect it and to main-tain its luster.Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-als with a spot remover will usuallystrip the wax from the finish. Be sureto re-wax these areas even if the restof the vehicle does not yet need wax-ing.

Finish damage repair Deep scratches or stone chips in thepainted surface must be repairedpromptly. Exposed metal will quicklyrust and may develop into a majorrepair expense.

✽✽ NOTICEIf your vehicle is damaged andrequires any metal repair orreplacement, be sure the body shopapplies anti-corrosion materials tothe parts repaired or replaced.

CAUTION• Wiping dust or dirt off the

body with a dry cloth willscratch the finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abra-sive cleaners, or strong deter-gents containing highly alka-line or caustic agents onchrome-plated or anodizedaluminum parts. This mayresult in damage to the pro-tective coating and cause dis-coloration or paint deteriora-tion.

Maintenance

427

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Bright-metal maintenance• To remove road tar and insects,

use a tar remover, not a scraper orother sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal parts from corrosion, apply acoating of wax or chrome preser-vative and rub to a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastalareas, cover the bright metal partswith a heavier coating of wax orpreservative. If necessary, coat theparts with non-corrosive petroleumjelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenanceCorrosive materials used for ice andsnow removal and dust control maycollect on the underbody. If thesematerials are not removed, acceler-ated rusting can occur on underbodyparts such as the fuel lines, frame,floor pan and exhaust system, eventhough they have been treated withrust protection.Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-body and wheel openings with luke-warm or cold water once a month,after off-road driving and at the endof each winter. Pay special attentionto these areas because it is difficultto see all the mud and dirt. It will domore harm than good to wet downthe road grime without removing it.The lower edges of doors, rockerpanels, and frame members havedrain holes that should not beallowed to clog with dirt; trappedwater in these areas can cause rust-ing.

WARNINGAfter washing the vehicle, testthe brakes while driving slowlyto see if they have been affectedby water. If braking performanceis impaired, dry the brakes byapplying them lightly whilemaintaining a slow forwardspeed.

7 43

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Aluminum wheel maintenance The aluminum wheels are coatedwith a clear protective finish.• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,

polishing compound, solvent, orwire brushes on aluminum wheels.They may scratch or damage thefinish.

• Use only a mild soap or neutraldetergent, and rinse thoroughlywith water. Also, be sure to cleanthe wheels after driving on saltedroads. This helps prevent corro-sion.

• Avoid washing the wheels withhigh-speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any acid detergent. Itmay damage and corrode the alu-minum wheels coated with a clearprotective finish.

Maintenance

447

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

INTERIOR CARE Interior general precautions Prevent caustic solutions such asperfume and cosmetic oil from con-tacting the dashboard because theymay cause damage or discoloration.If they do contact the dashboard,wipe them off immediately. See theinstructions that follow for the properway to clean vinyl.

Cleaning the upholstery andinterior trim Vinyl Remove dust and loose dirt fromvinyl with a whisk broom or vacuumcleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with avinyl cleaner.

Fabric Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-ric with a whisk broom or vacuumcleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-tion recommended for upholstery orcarpets. Remove fresh spots imme-diately with a fabric spot cleaner. Iffresh spots do not receive immediateattention, the fabric can be stainedand its color can be affected. Also, itsfire-resistant properties can bereduced if the material is not proper-ly maintained.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder beltwebbing Clean the belt webbing with any mildsoap solution recommended forcleaning upholstery or carpet. Followthe instructions provided with thesoap. Do not bleach or re-dye thewebbing because this may weakenit.

Cleaning the interior windowglass If the interior glass surfaces of thevehicle become fogged (that is, cov-ered with an oily, greasy or waxyfilm), they should be cleaned withglass cleaner. Follow the directionson the glass cleaner container.

CAUTIONUsing anything but recommend-ed cleaners and proceduresmay affect the fabric’s appear-ance and fire-resistant proper-ties.

CAUTIONDo not scrape or scratch theinside of the rear window. Thismay result in damage to the rearwindow defroster grid.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Specifications / 8-2

Specifications

Specifications

28

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Item 4 Door 5 Door

Overall length 4,500 (177.2)/4,510 (177,5) 4,350 (171.3)

Overall width 1,735 (68.3) 1,735 (68.3)

Overall height 1,470 (57.9) 1,470 (57.9)

Front tread 1,495 (58.9) 1,495 (58.9)

Rear tread 1,485 (58.5) 1,485 (58.5)

Wheelbase 2,610 (102.8) 2,610 (102.8)

SPECIFICATIONSThe specifications given here are for general information only. Although this information was accurate at the time ofprinting, Kia reserves the right to change its vehicles or their specifications without notice. Please check with anauthorized Kia dealer for more precise and more up-to-date information.

mm (in)

Item Inflation Pressure Wheel lug nut torque

Tire Wheel kPa (psi) kg·m (lb·ft, N·m)

P195/60R15 6.0J x 15 210 (30)9~11

(65~79, 88~107)

P205/50R16 6.0J x 16 210 (30)9~11

(65~79, 88~107)

Compact spare tire

T125/70D15 420 (60)9~11

(65~79, 88~107)

Tires

Dimensions

8 3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Specifications

Light Bulb WattageHeadlights (Low/High) 55/60Front turn signal lights 27Position lights 5Front fog lights* 27Stop and tail lights 27/8Rear turn signal lights 27Back-up lights 17Rear side mark light 5High mounted stop light* 27 or LEDLicense plate lights 5Front map lamp 10Center dome lamp 10Door courtesy lamps 5Trunk room lamp 5Glove box lamp 5

Light bulbs

* : if equipped

Specifications

48

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel nec-essary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost andenergy savings.

Lubricant Volume ClassificationEngine oil *1 *2

4.0 l (4.23 US qt.)(drain and refill)

Manual transaxle fluid 2.0 l (2.11 US qt.)

Automatic transaxle fluid 6.6 l (6.97 US qt.) DIAMOND ATF SP-III

Power steering fluid 0.8 l (0.85 US qt.)

Coolant 6.6 l (6.97 US qt.)

Brake/Clutch fluid0.7~0.8 l

(0.7~0.8 US qt.)

Fuel 53 l (14 US gal.) -

API Service SJ, SL or above,ILSAC GF-3 or above

API Service GL-4 (SAE 75W-85, fill for-life)

PSF-III

FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

MIXTURE, Antifreeze with water (Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)

8 5

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Specifications

Recommended SAE viscositynumber

✽✽ NOTICEAlways be sure to clean the areaaround any filler plug, drain plug,or dipstick before checking or drain-ing any lubricant. This is especiallyimportant in dusty or sandy areasand when the vehicle is used onunpaved roads. Cleaning the plugand dipstick areas will prevent dirtand grit from entering the engineand other mechanisms that could bedamaged.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

Engine Oil *1

°C(°F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20,5W-30 (API SJ, SL / ILSAC GF-3). However, if the engine oil is not available in your coun-try, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

10W-30

5W-20, 5W-30

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and coldweather operating (starting and oil flow). Lower viscosity engine oils can pro-vide better fuel economy and cold weather performance, however, higher vis-cosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather.Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result inengine damage.When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will beoperated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommendedoil viscosity from the chart.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9Index

Index

29

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Air bag - Advanced supplemental restraint system..3-50Air cleaner....................................................................7-21Antenna ........................................................................3-98Audio system................................................................3-99Automatic transaxle.............................................4-6, 7-18

Battery ..........................................................................7-25Before driving ................................................................5-5Brake system................................................................4-11Brakes and clutch........................................................7-15

Climate control air filter.............................................7-22Cruise control ..............................................................4-21

Defroster.......................................................................4-45Door locks ......................................................................3-8

Electrical circuit protection........................................6-12Emergency starting .......................................................6-9Emission control system ...............................................5-3Engine compartment ...........................................2-4, 7-10

Engine cooling system.................................................7-12Engine oil and oil filter ...............................................7-11Exterior care ................................................................7-40

Fuel filler lid ................................................................3-80Fuel requirements .........................................................5-2

Gauges ..........................................................................4-29

Hazard warning flasher..............................................4-46Hood..............................................................................3-78How to use this manual ................................................1-2

If you have a flat tire...................................................6-24Ignition switch ...............................................................4-2Immobilizer system .......................................................3-6Instrument cluster.......................................................4-28Instrument panel overview...........................................2-3Interior care .................................................................7-44Interior features...........................................................3-90Interior lights ...............................................................3-87Interior overview...........................................................2-2

A

B

C

D

E

G

F

H

I

9 3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Index

Keys ................................................................................3-2

Label information........................................................5-25Lighting ........................................................................4-39Lubricants and fluids..................................................7-20Luggage net..................................................................3-97

Maintenance schedule...................................................7-3Maintenance services ....................................................7-2Manual climate control system ..................................4-47Manual transaxle .................................................4-5, 7-18Mirrors .........................................................................3-83

Overheating....................................................................6-8Owner maintenance ......................................................7-7

Parking brake ..............................................................7-16Power steering .............................................................7-17

Remote keyless entry ....................................................3-3Road warning ................................................................6-2

Safety belts ...................................................................3-27Seat................................................................................3-16Special driving conditions ............................................5-7Specifications .................................................................8-2Starting the engine ........................................................4-4Steering wheel ..............................................................4-18Storage compartment..................................................3-88Suggestions for economical operation .........................5-6Sunroof .........................................................................3-94

Theft-alarm system .....................................................4-58Tires and wheels ..........................................................7-28Tires pressure monitoring system (TPMS).................6-3Towing ..........................................................................6-19Traction control system ..............................................4-25Trailer towing ..............................................................5-17Trunk ............................................................................3-76

Vehicle break-in process ...............................................1-3Vehicle load limit .........................................................5-11

K

L

M

O

P

R

S

T

V

Index

49

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Warnings and indicators ............................................4-31Weight of the vehicle...................................................5-16Windows.......................................................................3-13Windshield defrosting and defogging........................4-56Wiper blades ................................................................7-23Wipers and washers ....................................................4-43

W

2007 spectra owners manual en

Documents

kia vehicle

kia dealer

word kia

new vehicle

particular vehicle

kia motors corporation

vehicle table of contents

vehicle breakin process